Zanussi ZT 1022 Owner`s manual

AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
Please read “Safety Brochure” before use.
English
CONTENTS
Check the supplied items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
FEATURES
Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting audio devices (such as a CD player). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Connecting to the jack on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Connecting the FM/AM antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Full of useful functions!. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
At time like this . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Connecting recording devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Front display (indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
SETUP
General setup procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
7.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
6.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
5.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
4.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
3.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
2.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Preparation before using YPAO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Starting the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Confirming the measurement result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Warning messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Switching the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Switching the information displayed on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function) . . . . . . . . 35
Changing the settings for the SCENE function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Enjoying the desired sound field effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
6.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Connecting front speakers compatible with bi-amp connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Enjoying multi-channel sounds (surround decoder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Playback without sound field effects (straight decoding mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Playing back fidelity sound of the selected source (direct mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Playing back the compressed audio dynamically (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Enjoying surround audio with headphones (SILENT CINEMA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Cable plugs and jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Audio/video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Analog video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Audio jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
En
2
PLAYBACK (continued)
Listening to FM/AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Changing FM/AM tuner frequency steps (Asia and General models only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Registering favorite stations (Preset tuning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Combining audio from the radio with video from an external device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Playing back songs with iPod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Controlling while watching a TV monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Controlling by iPod itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Playing back songs with Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Pairing Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Playing back songs by connecting to the Bluetooth device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Playing back songs with USB storage devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Controlling while watching a TV monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Combining a song from a USB storage device (iPod) with video from an external device. . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Configuring settings specific to an individual input source
(Option menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Available settings in Option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring the system settings of the unit
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Operating the ADVANCED SETUP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Features of the ADVANCED SETUP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Changing the speaker impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Changing the remote control ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Setting the bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Changing TV format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Removing HDMI video output upscaling limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Changing FM/AM frequency steps (Asia and General models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Initializing various settings for the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Controlling other devices with the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Registering remote control codes for TV operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Registering remote control codes for external device operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Initializing all remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Power/system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Tuner (FM/AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Ideal speaker layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Setup menu list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Configuring the speaker settings (Speaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Configuring the settings of audio output signals (Sound). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Setting sound program and decoder parameters (DSP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Configuring the various settings (Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Setting HDMI functions (HDMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Setting the language displayed on the TV screen (Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
HDMI signal compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
En
3
Check the supplied items
Preparing the remote control
• Insert the two supplied AAA batteries into the battery case, following the polarity markings (+ and -).
Check that the following accessories are supplied with this product.
■ Remote Control
■ Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x 2)
■ YPAO microphone
■ VIDEO AUX input cover
Operating range of the remote control
• Be sure to aim the remote control within the following range at the remote control sensor on the unit
during operation.
■ AM antenna
■ FM antenna
Within
6 m (20 ft.)
* The supplied FM antenna will differ depending
on your country or region.
■ CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
■ Easy Setup Guide
• This manual is created prior to production of the product. Some parts of the product and the
specifications may differ as a result of improvements, etc.
• This manual mainly explains operations using the supplied remote control.
■ Safety Brochure
• “
” indicates the explanations for better use.
• “
” indicates the cautions concerning operations or setup of the unit.
• This manual describes both the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod.” “iPod” means both “iPod” and
“iPhone” unless the explanation describes exceptions.
En
4
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Enjoying music stored on
iPod or Bluetooth devices
p.46, 53
Operating the iPod or USB
menu (on TV)
p.49, 55
Supports 2 to 7.1 channel speaker system.
Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in
various styles.
* Requires optional Yamaha products such as iPod dock, iPod
wireless system, and Bluetooth receiver.
USB device
PC
Audio
Bluetooth receiver
(optional)
Speakers
Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
Sound field reproductions like actual
movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
p.29
Multi-channel playback from stereo
sounds (surround decoder)
p.39
Enjoying enhanced compression
artifacts (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
p.40
p.37
Audio
HDMI Control
iPod dock/iPod
wireless system
(optional)
Audio
HDMI Control
Video
Audio/Video
AV receiver (the unit)
TV
BD/DVD player
Operating external
devices with the supplied
remote control
p.78
Selecting the input source and
favorite settings at once (SCENE)
Remote control
of this unit
Easily connecting devices such
as game console to the HDMI jack
on the front panel
Operating the TV, AV
receiver and BD/DVD player
in combination
(HDMI Control)
p.35
p.26
TV remote control
p.92
En
5
● Creating stereoscopic sound fields (p.39)
Full of useful functions!
● Connecting various devices (p.18, 23)
Various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to
connect external devices such as BD/DVD player and
CD player. The unit is also equipped with input jacks on
the front panel which allow you easily connect and enjoy
game consoles, camcorders and USB devices, and so
on.
The unit supports the surround playback of up to 7.1
channel. Various sound programs and surround
decoders equipped with the unit can supply more
intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field in your
room. And, the unit creates virtual presence speakers to
produce 3D surround sound (CINEMA DSP 3D).
The combination of video/audio input jacks prepared on
this unit does not match an external device...
Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the
combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches
the output jack of your external device (p.25).
I want to fine adjust sound quality...
Use “Equalizer” in the “Setup” menu to adjust sound quality
of tone with an equalizer (p.67).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.68).
USB
device
BD/DVD
player
At time like this
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to redirect the
output audio signal to the TV (p.73).
CD
player
I want to prevent forgetting to turn the unit off...
Use “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu to prevent
forgetting to turn the unit off (p.71).
● Listening to radio with built-in receiver
(p.41)
Game
Console
TV
Camcorder
● Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio
Return Channel: ARC) (p.18, 73)
When using a TV that supports ARC, you only need an
HDMI cable to connect the TV and this unit. Making
such a simple connection enables to output video to the
TV, input audio from the TV, and transmit HDMI Control
signals at once.
HDMI Control
TV audio
You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as
preset stations automatically or manually.
● Enjoying faithful sound compared to the
original source (p.40)
When the Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back
the selected source with the least circuitry. It allows you
to enjoy the faithful sound quality compared to the
original source.
● Easy operation with a TV monitor
When connecting your TV to the unit with an HDMI
cable, the menu of the unit can be displayed on the TV
monitor to operate the unit. You can set the settings of
the unit viewing the TV monitor.
I want to play back BD/DVD player without the unit
turned on...
Use “Standby Through” in the “Setup” menu to play back
BD/DVD player while the unit keeps to be turned off (p.74).
There are many other functions to customize or confirm
the settings of this unit.
For details, see the following pages.
• SCENE settings (p.35)
• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.69)
• Various function settings (p.71)
• Current signal information (audio signal, video signal)
(p.61)
• Basic settings before use (p.76)
• YPAO (p.29)
• Operation menus of iPod and USB device (p.49, 55)
Video from
external device
• The “Option” menu (p.59)
• The “Setup” menu (p.63)
En
6
Part names and functions
Front panel
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V571
DIRECT
YPAO MIC
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
TUNING
VOLUME
SCENE
BD
DVD
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
1
(power) key
Turns the unit on or into the standby mode.
2 Standby indicator
When the unit is in standby mode, lights up in any of the
following cases when:
- The “Standby Through” function is working (p.74).
- The iPod is charging with “Standby Charge” (p.62).
- The Yamaha iPod wireless system is connected (p.48).
3 YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.29).
4 Remote control receiver
Receives signals from remote control (p.4).
5 INFO
Changes the information displayed on the front display
(p.34).
6 MEMORY
Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (p.43).
7 PRESET
Selects the FM/AM preset stations (p.43).
USB
INPUT
TONE CONTROL
TV
CD
PROGRAM
RADIO
VIDEO AUX
STRAIGHT
iPod/iPhone
HDMI IN
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
9 Front display
Displays information about the unit (p.8).
0 TUNING
Changes FM/AM tuner frequency (p.41).
a DIRECT
Enables/disables the direct mode (p.40).
b PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
c USB port
For connecting USB devices (p.55).
R
g PROGRAM
Selects a sound program and surround decoder (p.36).
h STRAIGHT
Enables/disables the straight decoding mode (p.40).
i VIDEO AUX jack
For connecting camcorders, game consoles, etc (p.26).
Attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover (p.4) when not
using this jack to protect against dust.
j VOLUME
Adjusts the volume level.
d INPUT
Switches the selected input source.
e TONE CONTROL
Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers
and headphones (p.60).
f SCENE
Selects the input source and the sound programs with a
single button. When the unit is in standby mode, press this
key to turn on the unit (p.35).
8 FM/AM
Switches FM/AM tuner band to FM or AM (p.41).
En
7
Front display (indicator)
OUT
ENHANCER ADAPTIVE DRC
STEREO
3 TUNED
SLEEP
VOL.
MUTE
SW
C
L
R
SL
SR
SBL SB SBR
1 HDMI
Lights up when an HDMI device is connected to the unit or
an HDMI signal is being output.
OUT
Lights up when HDMI signals are output.
2 CINEMA DSP
Lights up when a sound program with CINEMA DSP is
activated.
3 CINEMA DSP 3D
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.39) is activated.
4 ENHANCER
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer (p.40) is
activated.
5 ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.60) is activated.
6 STEREO
0 Cursor indicators
Lights up the available cursors on the remote control for each
operation.
a Multi information display
Displays a range of information.
Press INFO on the remote control or front panel repeatedly to
cycle through displayed information (p.34).
b Speaker indicators
Displays speaker terminals from which signals are output.
Front speaker L
Front speaker R
Center speaker
Surround speaker L
Surround speaker R
Surround back speaker L
Surround back speaker R
Surround back speaker (when connecting only a
single surround back speaker)
Subwoofer
Lights up when stereo broadcasting is input.
TUNED
Lights up when an FM/AM station is received.
7 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on (p.34).
8 MUTE
Flashes when audio is muted.
9 VOLUME
Displays the current volume level.
En
8
Rear panel
ARC
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI 5
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
R SURROUND L
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
R
L
SINGLE
AM
FM
PR
S VIDEO
75Ω
PB
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT
L
SPEAKERS
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
(U.K. and Europe models)
1 DOCK jack
For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock,
Wireless System for iPod and Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver (p.47, 48, 53).
2 HDMI OUT jack
For connecting a TV that is compatible with HDMI input to
output audio/video signals. TV audio is input when ARC is
used (p.18, 20, 21).
7 Power cable
For connecting the unit to an AC wall outlet (p.28).
8 MONITOR OUT jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For connecting a TV that is compatible with component video
signals and outputting video signals (p.22).
b SUBWOOFER jack
For connecting a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (p.16).
The area around the audio/video output jacks is marked in
white. Use these jacks to output audio/video signals to a TV
or other external device.
ARC
VIDEO jack
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
3 ANTENNA jacks
For connecting AM and FM antennas (p.27).
4 HDMI 1-5 jacks
For connecting external devices that are compatible with
HDMI outputs to receive audio/video signals (p.23).
5 SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting speakers (p.15).
6 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Select the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.28).
For connecting a TV that is compatible with video signals to
output video signals (p.22).
HDMI 2
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
R
FRONT
R SURROUND L
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
R
L
75Ω
PB
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR OUT
L
For connecting to playback devices equipped with audio/
video outputs to receive audio/video signals (p.23).
CENTER
FM
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
9 AV1-6 jacks
L
SINGLE
AM
PR
SPEAKERS
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
A
AV 2
A
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV
A 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV
A 4
AV
A 5
AV
A 6
AV
OUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
Output jacks
0 AV OUT jacks
For outputting received audio/video signals when analog
inputs (AV5-6 or AUDIO) are selected (p.27).
a AUDIO jacks
For connecting to playback devices equipped with analog
audio outputs to input audio signals (p.26).
En
9
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Remote control
Transmits infrared signals.
2 SOURCE
(source power)
Switches an external device on and off.
CODE SET
Select an input source on the unit to play back.
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
5
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
DIRECT
SCENE
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
SETUP
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
Operate the FM/AM tuner.
FM
AM
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNING
Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM.
Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM.
Presets radio stations.
Selects a preset station.
Changes tuning frequencies.
5 INFO
Switches the information displayed on the front display
(p.34).
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
a MODE
Switches the FM broadcast receiving modes (p.42) or the
iPod operation modes (p.52).
b Numeric keys
Enter numbers such as the frequency of FM/AM tuner and
remote control codes.
c TV control keys
Controls TV operation, such as input and volume level
(p.78, 79).
d CODE SET
Sets remote control codes for external devices (p.78).
e SOURCE/RECEIVER
4 Radio keys
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HDMI 1-5 jacks
VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel
AV 1-6 jacks
Audio jack
A Yamaha iPod universal dock, iPod
wireless receiver, and Bluetooth
wireless receiver that are connected to
the DOCK jack.
FM/AM tuner
USB devices connected the USB jack.
Operate recording, playback, menu displays, etc. for
external devices (p.79, 80).
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUTE
HDMI 1-5
V-AUX
AV 1-6
AUDIO
DOCK
USB
TUNER
BD
DVD
3 Input selection keys
0 External device operation keys
ENT
6 SLEEP
Selects the time of sleep timer (120 min., 90 min., 60 min.,
30 min., and Off) by pressing this key repeatedly. SLEEP
indicator lights up on the front display while using the sleep
timer. After the selected time passes, the unit switches into
the standby mode.
f RECEIVER
(receiver power)
Switches the unit between on and standby mode.
g Sound selection keys
Switches between the sound field effect (sound program)
you are using and the surround decoder (p.36).
h OPTION
Displays/finishes the “Option” menu for each input source
(p.59).
i VOLUME
Adjusts the volume balance (p.34).
j MUTE
7 SCENE
Switch the input source and the sound program with a single
button. When the unit is in standby mode, pressing this key
turns on the unit (p.35).
Turns the mute function on and off (p.34).
• Remote control codes need to be registered in advance to operate
8 SETUP
Displays/finishes the “Setup” menu for the unit (p.63).
9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Switches the device (external device or the unit) that is
available with remote control keys. Lights up in orange when
the unit is selected, in green when an external device is
selected.
external devices with this remote control. If you use HDMI
compatible devices, remote control might be available only by
connecting them (p.92).
Select menu items and settings.
Confirms a selected item.
Returns to the previous screen when
the menu is displayed.
En
10
SETUP
General setup procedure
Perform the following 8 steps before use.
1 Speaker layout (p.12)
Select the speaker layout depending on the number of speakers, and then place the speakers in
the room.
2 Connecting speakers (p.15)
Connect each speaker to the unit.
3 Connecting a TV (p.18)
Connect TV to the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices (p.23)
Connect video devices (BD/DVD players, etc.) or audio devices (CD players, etc.) to the unit.
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.27)
Connect the FM/AM antennas to the unit.
6 Connecting recording devices (p.27)
Connect external devices such as recording devices.
7 Connecting the power cable (p.28)
After all the settings above are complete, plug in the power cable.
8
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically
(YPAO) (p.29)
Adjust the volume balance and tone of speakers automatically (YPAO).
All settings needed before use are completed here. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio, etc. with the unit!
En
11
1 Speaker layout 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Speaker layout
Select the speaker layout depending on the numbers of speakers, and then place the speakers and subwoofer (with a built-in amplifier) in the room.
The following section describes the representative speaker configuration of 2.1 to 7.1 channel system.
NOTES
• (U.S.A. and Canada models only) The unit is configured to 8Ω speakers as the factory setting. 6Ω speakers can be also connected. For details on settings for 6Ω speaker connection, refer to “Changing the speaker
impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only)” (p.76).
• (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models) Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6Ω.
Type of speakers
Abbr.
Front (L)
For the front channel sound (stereo sound) and effect sound
Front (R)
Center
For the center channel sound (dialogue, vocals, etc.)
Surround (L)
For effect and vocal sound from surround channel. Sound from surround back channel is also output when you do not use
surround back speakers.
Surround (R)
Speaker system
(the number of channels)
Function
Surround back (L)
For the surround back channel sound and effect sound from rear.
Surround back (R)
Surround back
For the surround back channel sound mixed with left and right and effect sound from rear.
Subwoofer
For low-frequency effect (LFE) sound and bass sound from front and surround channels.
7.1
6.1
5.1
4.1
3.1
2.1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
• To get recommended speaker layout, refer to “Ideal speaker layout” (p.87).
En
12
1 Speaker layout 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7.1-channel speaker layout
5.1-channel speaker layout
6.1-channel speaker layout
4.1-channel speaker layout
En
13
1 Speaker layout 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3.1-channel speaker layout
2.1-channel speaker layout
En
14
1 2 Connecting speakers 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 Connecting speakers
Connect speakers to the unit. Here are connections of
7.1- and 6.1-channel speaker layout as examples. If you
select another channel speaker layout, connect
speakers while referring to the connection of 6.1channel speaker layout.
7.1-channel speaker layout
The unit (rear)
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
6.1-channel speaker layout
The unit (rear)
R SURROUND L
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
R
L
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
R SURROUND L
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP L
R
SINGLE
SINGLE
NOTES
• Disconnect the power plug before connecting speakers.
• Before connecting a subwoofer, turn off a subwoofer.
• Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
anything or come into contact with the metal areas of the unit.
This may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables
short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES!” will appear on the front
display when the unit is switched on.
Necessary cables (not supplied)
† Speaker cables
x numbers of speakers
+
–
+
–
† Monaural pin cable (for subwoofer)
x1
Speaker terminals on the rear of the unit
R
FRONT
CENTER
L
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
R SURROUND L
R
L
SINGLE
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
ARC
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
R SURROUND L
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
R
L
SINGLE
AM
FM
PR
75Ω
PB
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT
L
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
SPEAKERS
En
15
1 2 Connecting speakers 3 4 5 6 7 8
■ Connecting speaker cables
Each speaker has two speaker cables. One is for
connecting the - (negative) terminal of the unit and the
speaker, and the other is for the + (positive) terminal.
The cables are different colors, so they do not get mixed
up. Connect the black side to the - (negative) terminal
and the other side to the + (positive) terminal.
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in.) of insulation
from the end of the speaker cable and twist the bare
wire firmly.
2 Loosen the speaker
terminal.
Connecting front speakers
compatible with bi-amp
connection
NOTES
• Before making the bi-amplification connections, remove any
brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. When
not making bi-amplification connections, make sure that the
When you use front speakers that support bi-amp
connection, connect the speakers to FRONT terminals
and SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP terminals.
To activate the bi-amplification connections, set the “BIAMP” (p.77) to “ON” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
after connecting the power plug.
brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for more
detail.
• When making the bi-amplification connections, the surround
back speakers are not available.
The unit (rear)
+ (Red)
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
R SURROUND L
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP L
R
SINGLE
FR
ON
T
3 Insert the bare wire
into the gap on the
side of terminal.
- (Black)
When it is difficult to
insert the wire into the
gap on the side,
insert it into the gap downside of terminal.
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
4 Tighten the terminal.
Connecting with a banana plug (Except for U.K.,
Europe, Asia and Korea models)
Tighten the knob, and then insert a banana plug into the
end of the terminal.
FR
ON
T
Banana plug
■ Connecting a subwoofer
Use monaural pin cable to connect a subwoofer.
Before connecting a subwoofer, turn off the subwoofer.
Monaural pin cable
En
16
Cable plugs and jacks
The unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for devices.
Audio/video jacks
Analog video jacks
Audio jacks
HDMI jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
OPTICAL jacks
Digital videos and sounds are transmitted. Use an HDMI
cable for connection.
The signal is separated into three devices:
Luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB) and
chrominance red (PR).
Use a component video pin cable with three plugs.
These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals. Use
fiber-optic cables for connection. Remove the cap
before using if needed.
HDMI cable
Digital optical cable
Component video cables
Red
PR
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. Using an HDMI cable
less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft.) long is recommended to prevent signal
quality degradation.
• When connecting an external device with a DVI jack, use an HDMI/
Blue
COAXIAL jacks
Green
These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals. Use
coaxial cables.
PB
Y
Digital coaxial cable
DVI-D cable.
S VIDEO jack (U.K. and Europe models only)
• The HDMI control function, the Audio Return Channel function and
transmission of 3D content are supported.
This jack transmits S-video signals that include
luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) components. Use
S-video cable.
S-video cable
AUDIO jacks
These jacks transmit conventional analog audio signals.
Use stereo pin cables.
Stereo pin cable
VIDEO jack
This jack transmits conventional analog video signal.
Use a video pin cable.
Video pin cable
En
17
1 2 3 Connecting a TV 4 5 6 7 8
3 Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to the unit. The video signals input to the unit are output to the TV.
TV audio can also be output from the unit. The recommended way to connect a TV
varies depending on types and functions of video input jacks on the TV.
Select how to connect the TV to the unit while referring to the TV manual.
Does your TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
■ Connection method 1 (ARC-compatible TV)
Connect a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.
• The following connections and steps are supplied, supposing that “HDMI” in the “Setup” menu has not been
Yes
■ Connection method 1
(on this page)
changed from the default setting (p.72).
HDMI OUT jack
No
ARC
Does your TV support
HDMI Control?
The unit (rear)
Yes
HDMII
HDMI OUT
■ Connection method 2 (p.20)
ARC
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
HDMI input
HDM
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
No
AM
FM
ARC
PR
75Ω
PB
Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack?
Yes
VIDEO
HDMI
HDMI
Y
■ Connection method 3 (p.21)
No
MONITOR OUT
MONITO
L
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
TV
■ Connection method 4 (p.22)
• When connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, video signals from all types of the video input jacks
What is the HDMI control function?
can be output from the HDMI OUT jack. For more details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.91).
By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, some operations for the unit are
available with the TV’s remote control, such as turning on/standby and volume
control. If playback devices that support the HDMI control function (BD/DVD
players, etc.) are connected to the unit, these are also acceptable. For more details,
refer to “HDMI Control” (p.92).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, each function for the unit can be configured while
What is the Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
1 After connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and AC
If your TV supports the ARC, TV audio can be output to the unit by using an HDMI
cable transmitting video signals from the unit to a TV.
viewing the TV monitor (p.63).
Necessary settings
To use the HDMI control function and ARC, the following settings are required in
advance.
power cable, turn on the unit, TV and playback devices.
Continues to the
next page
En
18
1 2 3 Connecting a TV 4 5 6 7 8
2 Configure the settings for ARC.
a Confirm that the ARC function for the TV is set to on.
For details on how to confirm, refer to manual of the TV.
b Change the input settings for the TV to video signals from the unit.
SETUP
RETURN
URN
RNN
TOP
For details on setting the HDMI control function, refer to the manual of each device.
The unit and devices are also turned off automatically with the TV’s operation. If they
do not turn off, turn them off manually.
OPTION
VOLUME
ENTER
a Activate the HDMI control function of the TV and the devices that support the HDMI
control function.
b Turn off the TV.
c Press SETUP.
SETUP
3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
DISPLAY
DIS
D
A
Cursor keys
ENTER
The unit also turns on with the TV. If the unit does not turn on, turn it on manually.
d Change input video source on the TV to video signals from the unit.
POP UP
d Press the cursor keys (
c Turn on the TV.
/
) to select “HDMI.”
e Turn on the playback devices, and then confirm the following:
Unit: Whether the input signals from the playback devices are selected as the HDMI
input source (any of “HDMI 1-5”). When it is not selected, select the correct input
source manually.
TV: Whether the video signals from the playback devices are displayed on the TV
screen.
f Confirm whether the unit is linked with operations of the TV remote control as follows:
Turning on/standby, volume control and selecting audio output devices.
If these operations are not available, check that “HDMI Control” (p.72) in the “Setup”
menu is set to “On.”
e Press the cursor keys (
/
) to select “HDMI Control,” and then press ENTER.
• If playing back audio source by using the ARC function has a problem, set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu
to “Off,” and connect the TV and the unit with an optical cable (p.20).
• If the HDMI control function does not work correctly, it may be effective to turn off the devices to reset
them or plug in the power cable and retry with the power cable plugged in.
• If the power-on operation is not linked, confirm the priority of audio output settings for the TV.
All settings have been completed.
When a TV program is selected with the TV remote control, input source of the unit is
switched to “AV4” automatically, and TV sound is output.
If it does not work correctly, confirm that the “ARC” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On.”
f Press the cursor keys (
/
) to select “On,” and then press ENTER.
g Confirm that “ARC” is set to “On.”
• “AV4” is selected as the input sound source from a TV as the default setting. When the AV4 jack is
used for another device, select an input jack to be used for the TV audio in “TV Audio Input” on the
• “ARC” is set to “On” as the default setting. When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” the ARC function of
the unit is enabled.
“Setup” menu. Also, when using the SCENE functions (p.35), register the appropriate input source on
SCENE (TV).
h Press SETUP.
En
19
1 2 3 Connecting a TV 4 5 6 7 8
■ Connection method 2 (HDMI Control -compatible TV)
Connect a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an optical cable.
c Press SETUP.
OPTION
SETUP
SETUP
VOLUME
ENTER
• The following connection and steps are supplied, supposing the “HDMI” in the “Setup” menu has not been
changed from the default setting (p.72).
RETURN
URN
RNN
TOP
DISPLAY
DIS
D
A
Cursor keys
ENTER
POP UP
d Press the cursor keys (
/
) to select “HDMI.”
e Press the cursor keys (
/
) to select “HDMI Control,” and then press ENTER.
To use the HDMI control function, the following settings are required in advance.
f Press the cursor keys (
/
) to select “On,” and then press ENTER.
1 After connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and AC
power cable, turn on the unit, TV and playback devices.
2 Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
g Press SETUP.
HDMI OUT jack
ARC
The unit (rear)
HDMII
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
HDMI input
HDM
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AM
FM
PR
HDMI
75Ω
PB
VIDEO
HDMI
Y
MONITOR OUT
MONITO
L
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
O
AV 5
AV
AV66
AV
AV
OPTICAL
OUT
OUT
(TV)
OPTICAL
AUDIO1
AUDIO
AV 4
O
AV4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(Digital optical)
TV
• When connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, video signals from all types of the video input jacks
can be output from the HDMI OUT jack. For more details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.91).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, each function for the unit can be configured while
viewing the TV monitor (p.63).
Necessary setting
a Activate the HDMI control function of the TV and the devices that support the HDMI
control function.
For details on setting the HDMI control function, refer to manual of each device.
h Turn off the TV.
The unit and devices are also turned off automatically with the TV’s operation. If they
do not turn off, turn them off manually.
i Turn on the TV.
The unit also turns on. If the unit does not turn on, turn it on manually.
j Change input video source on the TV to video signals from the unit.
b Change the input settings for the TV to video signals from the unit.
Continues to the
next page
En
20
1 2 3 Connecting a TV 4 5 6 7 8
k Turn on the playback devices, and then confirm the following:
Unit: Whether the input signals from the playback devices are selected as the HDMI
input source (any of “HDMI 1-5”). When it is not selected, select the correct input
source manually.
TV: Whether the video signals from the playback devices are displayed on the TV
screen.
■ Connection method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)
Connect a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an optical cable.
HDMI OUT jack
ARC
The unit (rear)
HDMII
l Confirm whether the unit is linked with operations of the TV remote control as follows:
HDMI OUT
ARC
Turning on/standby, volume control and selecting audio output devices.
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
HDMI input
HDM
ANTENNA
If these operations are not available, confirm that “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu
is set to “On.”
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AM
PR
HDMI
75Ω
PB
All settings have been completed.
FM
VIDEO
HDMI
Y
MONITOR OUT
MONITO
L
When a TV program is selected with the TV’s remote control, the input source of the
unit is switched to “AV4” automatically, and TV sound is output.
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
When these operations are not linked, confirm that “HDMI Control” in the “Setup”
menu is set to “On.”
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
O
AV 5
AV
AV66
AV
AV
OPTICAL
OUT
OUT
(TV)
OPTICAL
AUDIO1
AUDIO
AV 4
O
AV4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(Digital optical)
TV
• When the HDMI control function does not work correctly, it may be effective to turn off the devices to
reset or plug in the power cable and retry with the power cable plugged in.
• If the power-on operation is not linked, confirm the priority of audio output settings for the TV.
• “AV4” is selected as input sound source from a TV as the default setting. When the AV4 jack is used
for another device, select an input jack to be used for the TV audio in “TV Audio Input” of the “Setup”
menu. Also, when using the SCENE functions (p.35), register the appropriate input source for SCENE
(TV).
By switching input source into “AV4” with AV4 key on the remote control or SCENE. TV
sound is output from the unit.
• When connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, video signals from all types of the video input jacks
can be output from the HDMI OUT jack. For more details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.91).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, each function for the unit can be configured while
viewing the TV monitor (p.63).
• When the AV4 jack is used for another device, or another terminal, except when an OPTICAL jack (with an
optical cable) is used for inputting TV sound, select another jack (any of AV 1-6 or AUDIO) for the
connection. Also, set the input sources setting of SCENE (TV) (p.35).
En
21
1 2 3 Connecting a TV 4 5 6 7 8
■ Connection method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)
Connect a TV by any of the following connections depending on the input jack for TV
video that is used.
By switching the input source to “AV4” with AV4 on the remote control or SCENE (TV),
TV sound is output from the unit.
COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component cable)
Video input
(Component video)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jack
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
The unit (rear)
PR
PR
PR
ARC
PB
(BD/DVD)
HDMI OUT
DOCK
HDMI 1
PB
Y
AM
PB
FM
PR
setting of the unit, operations of iPod/USB devices) are not available.
• When connecting a TV with a cable, other than an HDMI cable, available video signals are limited as
75Ω
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR OUT
MONITO
follows. For details, refer to the “Video signal flow” (p.91).
L
R
O
- Video signal from the HDMI input jacks are not output from the video output jacks other than HDMI.
- The component video and composite video signals input from an external device are only output from the
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
AV
AV66
AV 5
AV
AV
OPTICAL
OUT
OUT
(TV)
OPTICAL
AUDIO1
AUDIO
AV 4
MONITOR OUT jacks.
O
AV4 (OPTICAL) jack
- The S-video signals input from an external device are only output from the HDMI OUT jack (U.K. and
TV
Audio output
(Digital optical)
Europe models).
• When the AV4 jack is used for another device, or another terminal, except for an OPTICAL jack (with an
Y
Y
Y
MONITOR OUT
PB
PB
PR
HDM
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
• When connecting to a TV with a cable, other than an HDMI cable, operations with TV screen (such as the
VIDEO connection (with a video pin cable)
optical cable), is used for inputting TV sound, select another jack (any of AV1-6 or AUDIO) for the
connection. Also, set the input sources setting of SCENE (TV) (p.35).
MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack
The unit (rear)
Video input
(Analog video)
ARC
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AM
V
VIDEO
FM
MONITOR OUT
PR
V
75Ω
PB
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT
L
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
O
AV 5
AV
AV66
AV
AV
OPTICAL
OUT
OUT
(TV)
OPTICAL
AUDIO1
AUDIO
AV 4
O
AV4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(Digital optical)
TV
En
22
1 2 3 4 Connecting playback devices 5 6 7 8
4 Connecting playback devices
The unit is equipped with various types of input jacks such as an HDMI jack. Connect
them to the appropriate output jacks on the playback devices.
For connecting an iPod, Bluetooth devices and USB storage devices, refer to the
following pages.
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component cable and an audio cable (an
optical cable or a coaxial cable). Input jacks of the unit (AV1-2) are different depending
on the audio jacks of the video device.
• Connecting an iPod (p.46)
Output jack of a video device
• Connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (p.53)
Input jack of the unit
Video
Audio
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.55)
Optical
AV1 (COMPONENT + OPTICAL)
Coaxial
AV2 (COMPONENT + COAXIAL)
Component video
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Video devices, such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and cable TV, and game
consoles, are connected to the unit. Select the correct connection according to the
output jacks (video/audio) of video devices connected to the unit. If a video device
supports HDMI, HDMI connection is recommended.
Video output
(Component video)
AV1-2
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
COMPONENT
VIDEO
The unit (rear)
PR
PR
PB
ARC
• Video signals input with an HDMI cable can only be output to a TV connected to the unit with an HDMI
cable.
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
Y
PR
AM
PB
HDM
PB
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM
Y
PR
Y
75Ω
• When an input jack of the unit does not match the output jack of a video device, select another jack of the
unit for the video device (p.25).
PB
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR OUT
MONITO
L
O
■ HDMI connection
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
The unit (rear)
OPTICAL
AV 5
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
ANTENNA
AM
HDMI 4
FRONT
AV 2
AUDIO
C
Video device
C
HDMI
L
Audio output
(Digital optical or coaxial)
HDMI output
HDMI 5
R
COAXIAL
AV1 (OPTICAL) jack or
AV2 (COAXIAL) jack
I
HDM
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
AV 6
AV
OUT
COAXIAL
I
HDM
ARC
OPTICAL
OR
AV 1
MI OUT
O
R
By selecting an input source with the AV1-2 key, audio and video from video devices are
output from the unit.
FM
75Ω
MONITOR OUT
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
L
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
Video device
R
HDMI 1-5 jacks
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
By selecting the input source with the HDMI 1-5 key, audio and video from video
devices are output from the unit.
En
23
1 2 3 4 Connecting playback devices 5 6 7 8
■ S-video connection
■ Analog video connection
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Connect video devices to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (any of a
coaxial cable, an optical cable and stereo pin cable.) Input jacks of the unit (AV3-6) are
different depending on the audio input jacks of the video devices.
Connect a video device to the unit with a S-video cable and an audio cable (an analog
stereo cable). AV5 is only available for S-video connection as the input source.
Output jack of video device
Output jack of a video device
Input jacks of the unit
Input jack of the unit
Video
Audio
S-video
Analog stereo
Video
Audio
AV5 (S VIDEO + AUDIO)
Coaxial
AV3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Optical
AV4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog video
AV5 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
AV5 (S VIDEO) jack
Analog stereo
AV6 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
The unit (rear)
S
Video output
(S video)
S VIDEO
ARC
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
DOCK
The unit (rear)
HDMI 2
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AM
Video output
(Analog video)
ARC
FM
S
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
ANTENNA
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AM
75Ω
PB
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
PR
Y
MONITOR OUT
L
L
MONITOR O
PB
L
L
L
V
VIDEO
V
Y
MONITOR OUT
R
M
L
R
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
R
AV5 (AUDIO)
jacks
R
O
Video device
Audio output
(Analog stereo)
Video device
O
R
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
OPTICAL
OR
AV
OUT
C
C
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
OR
L
L
L
L
R
R
R
R
• The video signals input from S VIDEO jack are converted and output from only HDMI OUT jack.
• When connecting to a TV with a cable except for an HDMI cable, the video signals input from S VIDEO jack
cannot be output to a TV.
AV3-6 jacks
Audio output
(any of digital optical,
coaxial, analog stereo)
• When connecting to S VIDEO jack, do not connect an analog video cable to VIDEO jack of the same input.
By selecting input source with the AV3-6 key, audio and video of video devices are
output from the unit.
En
24
1 2 3 4 Connecting playback devices 5 6 7 8
■ Change the combination of input jacks (video/audio)
When an input jack of the unit does not match an output jack of a video device, select
another jack of the unit to match the jack of the video device. The Following connections
become available with this setting.
Output jacks of a video device
Video
Video
Audio
Optical
HDMI 1-5
AV1 (OPTICAL)
AV4 (OPTICAL)
Coaxial
HDMI 1-5
AV2-3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo
HDMI 1-5
AV5-6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO
Analog stereo
AV1-2
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
AV5-6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO
HDMI
Component video
Input jacks of the unit
Audio
1 Complete the connections for external devices (such as a TV and
playback device), the power cable and so on, and then turn on the
unit and the TV.
2 Change the input source setting of the TV to the video from the unit.
3 Press AV2 to select “AV2” as the video input jack of the unit.
4 Press OPTION.
OPTION
VOL.
Tone Control
5 Press the cursor keys (
/
L
SL
As an example, the setting for connections, for which AV2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jack
is used for video signals and AV5 (AUDIO) jacks are used for audio signals, is shown
below.
Video output
(Component video)
AV2
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jack
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
R
SR
) repeatedly to select “Audio In.”
OPTION
Necessary settings
SW
C
92 /
Audio In
/
6/
6:
&
5
65
6 Press ENTER.
AV2
VOL.
Audio;;;;;;AV2
7 Press the cursor keys (
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
/ ) repeatedly to select “AV5” as the input
source.
The unit (rear)
PR
PR
PB
PB
PB
ARC
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
Y
Y
Y
HDMI 2
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AM
AV2
Audio;;;;;;AV5
FM
Input sources
75Ω
HDMI1-5, AV1-2
PR
VOL.
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
S VIDEO
PB
VIDEO
Y
L
MONITOR OUT
Settings
MONITOR O
L
L
AUDIO
HDMI1-5, AV1-6, AUDIO
R
L
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
AV
OUT
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO1
AV 5
AV5 (AUDIO) jack
Video device
L
R
Audio output
(Analog stereo)
8 Press OPTION.
All settings have been completed.
When switching the input source to “AV2” with the AV2 key, video and audio from
the video device are output from the unit.
En
25
1 2 3 4 Connecting playback devices 5 6 7 8
Connecting audio devices (such as a CD player)
Connecting to the jack on the front panel
Connect audio devices (such as a CD player, MD player and so on) to the unit.
Select a correct connection depending on the output jacks of the audio devices
connected to the unit.
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as a
video camera and a game console. Be sure to stop the device and turn down the
volume before connecting it to the unit.
Audio output jack of audio device
Audio input jack of the unit
Optical
AV1 (OPTICAL)
AV4 (OPTICAL)
Coaxial
AV2-3 (COAXIAL)
BD
DVD
INPUT
TV
CD
PROGRAM
TONE CONTROL
RADIO
VIDEO AUX
STRAIGHT
HDMI IN
HDMI
AV5-6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO
Analog stereo
VIDEO
V
L
L
AUDIO
R
R
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI output
The unit (rear)
Game Console
ARC
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
VIDEO
HDMI 2
H
ANTENNA
OMPONENT
VIDEO
AM
O
V
O
FM
OR
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
75Ω
C
VIDEO
L
C
COAXIAL
R OUT
COAXIAL
MONITOR OUT
L
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
OR
L
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
Video output
AUDIO
R
L
L
L
R
R
Audio device
Audio output
Video camera
R
R
AUDIO
AV1-6 jacks
AUDIO jack
Audio output
(any of digital optical,
coaxial, analog stereo)
By selecting input source as “V-AUX” with the V-AUX key, audio and video from the
connected device are output from the unit.
• When both the HDMI jack and the analog video/audio connection are connected, only the HDMI signal will
By selecting an input source with the AV1-6 key and AUDIO key, audio from audio
devices is output from the unit.
be input.
• To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when not using this jack.
En
26
1 2 3 4 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas 6 Connecting recording devices 7 8
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
Connect supplied indoor FM antenna and an AM antenna.
AM antenna
6 Connecting recording devices
Use AV OUT jacks to connect video and audio recording devices. Selected incoming
analog audio/video signals are output through AV OUT jacks.
FM antenna
• When recording video/audio of the video device, use AV5-6 jacks or VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks of
the unit to connect video devices.
The unit (rear)
• When recording audio of the audio device, use any of AV5-6 jacks, AUDIO jacks or VIDEO AUX (AUDIO)
jacks of the unit to connect audio devices.
ARC
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AM
HD
R
FRON
FM
PR
The unit (rear)
75Ω
PB
VIDEO
Video input
(Analog video)
Y
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT
ARC
HDMI OUT
DOCK
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
ANTENNA
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AM
FM
V
V
L
L
R
R
PR
75Ω
PB
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OU
L
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
AV OUT jacks
Press and hold
Insert
Video/audio
device
AV
OUT
Audio input
(Analog stereo)
Release
• From the AM antenna, take some wires, only the number needed for connections.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
En
27
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Connecting the power cable 8
7 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110-120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz.
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
R SURROUND L
CENTER
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
R
L
SINGLE
110V120V
220V240V
SPEAKERS
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
SUBWOOFER
• The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of the unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE
plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may
cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard.
After all connections are complete, connect the power plug to the outlet.
Plug into a wall outlet
R SURROUND L
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
R
L
SINGLE
SUBWOOFER
• The figure of the power plug may differ depending upon regions.
En
28
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
RECEIVER
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
ENHANCER
TV
CD
DIRECT
- After completing the connection of a TV, speakers, and so on, start YPAO
RADIO
- The test tone is output at a high volume while measuring. Please take care that
The unit (front)
measurement.
the test tone does not frighten any small children. Also, avoid using YPAO at
OPTION
SETUP
your listening position. Connect the YPAO
microphone to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
• Be aware of the following when using YPAO.
SCENE
BD
DVD
4 Set the YPAO microphone at the height of your ear in
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
SLEEP
The YPAO microphone (supplied) detects the status of speaker
connections and the distance between these speakers and the
listening position, and adjusts the volume balance and the tone
settings automatically (YPAO: Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic
Optimizer).
night, so as to not make your neighbors troubled.
VOLUME
ENTER
DISPLAY
A
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
Cursor keys
ENTER
- Keep your room quiet while measuring.
- Do not connect headphones to the unit.
YPAO microphone
listening position
- YPAO can be performed by viewing the front display of the unit.
MODE
Preparation before using YPAO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
ENT
Ear height
1 Press RECEIVER to turn on the unit.
2 Turn on the TV, and then select the input source of
the TV to the video input from the HDMI OUT jack of
the unit.
3 Turn on the subwoofer, and then set the volume of
Place the YPAO microphone at ear height in
your listening position. We recommend using
a tripod to adjust the height. You can use the
tripod screws to fix the microphone in place.
The following display appears on the TV monitor and front
display.
the subwoofer to half. The cross-over frequency is
set to maximum if it is present.
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
MAX
• When a subwoofer that supports the automatic standby function (turn off
automatically during no signals input) is used, disable the function before
going to the next step.
• To cancel the measurement, disconnect the YPAO microphone before
measuring or press the cursor key (
) to select “Exit” and press ENTER.
En
29
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
Starting the measurement
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
2 Confirm that “Save / Exit” is selected and then press
ENTER.
Start the measurement by following these steps.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
• To confirm the measurement result, select “Result.” For details, refer to the
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
• YPAO measurement is not performed correctly when any obstacles are in the
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
“Confirming the measurement result” (p.31).
room.
• While measuring, keep stuff in the corners or remove it from the room. It takes
TUNER
USB
approximately 3 minutes to finish this measurement.
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
1 Confirm that “Start” is selected, and then press
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
SETUP.
DIRECT
The measurement starts in 10 seconds. Press ENTER if you
want to start the measurement immediately.
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
SETUP
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
POP-UP
MENU
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
MUTE
• To cancel the measurement, press RETURN to stop temporarily, press
ENTER, select “EXIT” and then press ENTER.
• To retry the measurement from the temporary stop, select “RETRY” and then
3 Confirm that “SAVE” is selected, and then press the
ENTER.
press ENTER.
MODE
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
4
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, press the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and then press ENTER.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
• If an error message (such as “E-1:No Front SP”) or a warning message
(such as “W-1:Out of Phase”) appears, refer to “Error messages” or
“Warning messages” (p.32, 33).
4 Remove the YPAO microphone.
All settings for the speakers have been completed.
CAUTION
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. Protect YPAO microphone from
high temperatures (such as near AV equipment) and direct sunlight.
En
30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
Confirming the measurement result
CODE SET
2 Press the cursor keys (
Confirm the YPAO measurement result.
HDMI
1
2
3
1 After measurement, press the cursor keys to select
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
“Result,” and then press ENTER.
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
) to select an item.
Wiring
Displays the condition of the polarity of each connected
speaker.
“Normal”: Speakers are connected at the normal polarity. (+
and -)
“Reverse”: Speakers are connected at the opposite side of
normal polarity. (+ and -)
Size
Displays the size of the connected speakers.
“Large”: The connected speaker has the ability to
reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively.
“Small”: The connected speaker does not have the ability to
reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively.
The value displayed above “SWFR” describes the cross over
frequency of the subwoofer.
Distance
Displays the distance between connected speakers and the
listening position.
Level
Displays the result of the adjustment of output level of
connected speakers.
The following display appears.
USB
FM
/
The red-box indicates the speaker that has a problem in the
following items. For details on remedy of each problem, refer to
“Warning messages” (p.33).
SOURCE RECEIVER
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
SETUP
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
Cursor keys
MODE
ENTER
RETURN
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
10
4
8
Red-boxed message indicates a speaker that has a problem.
1 Measurement items
2 Measurement result for each speaker
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
• The speaker indicated with red box shows that it may have a certain
problem. Check the connection or placement, and if necessary, perform
YPAO again referring “Warning messages” (p.33).
3 To return the previous screen after confirmation,
press ENTER or RETURN.
• (If no problem with the result) Press the cursor key ( )
to select “Save / Exit” and ENTER, and then confirm that
“SAVE” is selected and press ENTER to finish the YPAO.
• (If some problem with the result) Press the cursor key
( ) to select “Save / Exit” and ENTER, and then press
the cursor key ( ) to select “CANCEL” and ENTER. To
restart the YPAO measurement, select “Start.” To finish
the YPAO, select “Exit.”
En
31
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message can be confirmed and controlled by viewing both a TV
monitor and the front display.
■ Procedure to exit YPAO
1 Check the contents of error message, and then press ENTER.
2 Press the cursor key ( ) to select “EXIT (Exit)” from the following
choices, and then press ENTER.
YPAO
ENHANCER
iPod CHARGE
SLEEP
STEREO
TUNED
E-1:NO FRNT SP
TV monitor
Front display
Choices: PROCEED (Proceed) (E-5, E-9 only), “RETRY (Retry),” “EXIT (Exit)”
VOL.
PL
L
SL
SW
C
PR
R
SR
3 Press the cursor key (
) to select “Exit (Exit)” from the following
choices, and then press ENTER.
Choices: Start (Start), Exit (Exit)
4 Remove the YPAO microphone.
■ Cause and remedy for each error message
Error message
Cause
Remedy
E-1:No Front SP
(E-1:NO FRNT SP)
Front speakers are not
detected.
E-2:No Sur. SP
(E-2:NO SUR SP)
Either of surround
speakers is not detected.
E-4:SBR→SBL
(E-4:SBR->SBL)
A surround back speaker
is connected to the R side
only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow “Procedure to exit YPAO” to exit YPAO, turn off the
unit, and then reconnect the speaker. After reconnecting, turn on the unit, and then perform YPAO again.
E-5:Noisy
(E-5:NOISY)
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and select “RETRY (Retry)” in step 2 of “Procedure to exit YPAO” to restart YPAO for an accurate measurement. Selecting
“PROCEED (Proceed)” allows you to continue measuring, but may not achieve the optimal results.
We recommend selecting “RETRY (Retry)” or “EXIT (Exit)” to retry YPAO again from the beginning.
E-6:Check Sur.
(E-6:CHECK SUR)
Any surround back
speaker is connected
while no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers should be connected when using surround back speakers. Follow “Procedure to exit YPAO” to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then
reconnect the speakers. After reconnecting, turn on the unit, and then perform the YPAO measurement again.
E-7:No MIC
(E-7:NO MIC)
The YPAO microphone has
been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and select “RETRY (Retry)” in step 2 of “Procedure to exit YPAO” to restart the measurement.
E-8:No Signal
(E-8:NO SIGNAL)
The YPAO microphone
cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and select “RETRY (Retry)” in step 2 of “Procedure to exit YPAO” to restart the measurement.
If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-9:User Cancel
(E-9:CANCEL)
The measurement has
been canceled.
Select “PROCEED (Proceed)” in step 2 of “Procedure to exit YPAO” to resume the measurement. Select “RETRY (Retry)” to restart the measurement from
first.
E-10:Internal Err.
(E-10:INTERNAL)
An internal error has
occurred.
Follow “Procedure to exit YPAO” to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. Perform YPAO again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
Follow “Procedure to exit YPAO” to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. After removing problems, turn on the unit, and
then perform YPAO again.
En
32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
Warning messages
Even if any warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can save the measurement results. However, we recommend that you perform YPAO again for the optimal
speaker settings.
The speaker indicator that has a
problem flashes.
YPAO
ENHANCER
iPod CHARGE
STEREO
TUNED
W-1:PHASE
TV monitor
SLEEP
VOL.
PL
L
SL
SW
C
PR
R
SR
Front display
■ Cause and remedy for each warning message
Warning message
W-1:Out of Phase
(W-1:PHASE)
W-2:Over Distance
(W-2:DISTANCE)
W-3:Level Error
(W-3:LEVEL)
Cause
Any of the speaker cables
may be connected with the
reversed polarity (+/-).
Any of the speakers is
placed too far from the
listening position.
There are a significant
volume differences
between the speakers.
Remedy
a
b
c
d
e
Check the speaker with warning (indicated with red box) in “Wiring” (p.31).
Check the connection of the speaker with warning.
Press RETURN to return to the previous screen.
Press the cursor key ( ) to select “Save / Exit” and press ENTER.
(If some trouble): Select “EXIT (Exit)” and press ENTER.
(If no trouble):
Select “SAVE (Save)” and press ENTER.
f Remove the YPAO microphone to finish YPAO.
g (If some trouble) Turn off the unit and reconnect the speaker. After reconnecting, perform YPAO again.
When using the speakers that are designed with reverse polarity for better performance, this warning may appear even if the speakers are connected
properly.
a
b
c
d
e
Check the speaker with warning (indicated with red box) in “Distance” (p.31).
Check the placement of the speaker with warning.
Press RETURN to return to the previous screen.
Press the cursor key ( ) to select “Save / Exit” and press ENTER.
(If some trouble): Select “EXIT (Exit)” and press ENTER.
(If no trouble):
Select “SAVE (Save)” and press ENTER.
f Remove the YPAO microphone to finish YPAO.
g (If some trouble) Turn off the unit and relocate the speaker. After relocating, perform YPAO again.
a
b
c
d
e
Check the speaker with warning (indicated with red box) in “Level” (p.31).
Check the connection of the speaker with warning. Also check the use environment, or the volume of the subwoofer.
Press RETURN to return to the previous screen.
Press the cursor key ( ) to select “Save / Exit” and press ENTER.
(If some trouble): Select “EXIT (Exit)” and press ENTER.
(If no trouble):
Select “SAVE (Save)” and press ENTER.
f Remove the YPAO microphone to finish YPAO.
g (If some trouble) Turn off the unit and resolve the problem. After resolving the problem, perform YPAO again.
We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with as similar as possible.
En
33
PLAYBACK
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Basic playback procedure
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
5
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
Input selection keys
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUNING
INFO
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
DIRECT
SLEEP
SCENE
CD
source, or select a radio station.
Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the external
device.
RADIO
OPTION
VOLUME
1 Turn on external devices (TV, BD/DVD player, etc.)
connected to the unit.
2 Use the Input selection keys to select the input
source.
3 Play the external device selected as the input
VOLUME
For details on FM/AM tuning and playing the iPod, Bluetooth
devices or USB devices, refer to the following pages.
DISPLAY
A
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
MODE
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
4
MUTE
•
•
•
•
Listening to FM/AM (p.41)
Playing back songs with iPod (p.46)
Playing back songs with Bluetooth devices (p.53)
Playing back songs with USB storage devices (p.55)
4 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume level.
Switching the information displayed on
the front display
1 Press INFO on the remote control or front panel
repeatedly.
The information (such as the selected input, sound program,
surround decoder, FM/AM frequency) displayed on the front
display is switched.
■ Information for each input
The information displayed the front display varies depending on the
selected input.
Input sources except for TUNER, DOCK (for wired iPod) and
USB are selected:
Input
DSP Program
Audio Decoder
TV
INPUT
TUNER is selected:
TV VOL
MUTE
• Press MUTE to turn the mute on. Press MUTE again to turn the mute off.
Frequency
DSP Program
Audio Decoder
• High-frequency/low-frequency output can be adjusted in the “Option” menu
(p.60) or with TONE CONTROL on the front panel (p.7).
• To correct the volume differences between each input source, adjust the
parameter in “Volume Trim” of the “Option” menu (p.60).
• When receiving Radio Data System (U.K. and Europe models only)
Program Service
Program Type
Frequency
Switching the sleep timer
Audio Decoder
Radio Text
Clock Time
DSP Program
DOCK (for wired iPod) or USB is selected:
Sleep timer function switches the unit to standby mode
automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed. Press
SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to set the time for the sleep
timer function as follows.
120 min.
90 min.
60 min.
30 min.
Song
Artist
Album
DSP Program
Audio Decoder
Off
• The SLEEP indicator lights up when the sleep timer is on.
En
34
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
SOURCE/
RECEIVER
Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function)
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
ENHANCER
TUNING
TV
CD
1 Press SCENE.
1 Do the following steps to select the settings that you
RADIO
SCENE
• Selecting the input source (p.34)
• Selecting the sound program (p.36)
SCENE
synchronization
(p.73)
SCENE
Input
BD/DVD
HDMI1
STRAIGHT
Off
On
TV
AV4
STRAIGHT
On
On
CD
AV3
STRAIGHT
Off
Off
RADIO
TUNER
7ch Stereo
On
Off
VOLUME
MODE
Compressed
Music
Enhancer
(p.40)
Sound program/
surround
decoder (p.36)
DISPLAY
A
MUTE
• Enabling/disabling Compressed Music Enhancer (p.40)
Default settings for each SCENE are as follows.
OPTION
POP-UP
MENU
want to register for SCENE.
DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
Changing the settings for the SCENE
function
The registered settings on SCENE that you pressed are
reflected. When the unit is in standby mode, press this key to
turn it on.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
SLEEP
With the SCENE function, an input source and registered settings
(the sound program/surround decoder, Compressed Music
Enhancer, etc.) can be selected with a single key.
• Enabling/disabling the SCENE synchronization function
(p.73)
2 Press and hold SCENE on the remote control or
front panel until “SET Complete” appears on the
front panel.
VOL.
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
4
When external devices, such as a TV or BD/DVD player
compatible with the HDMI control function, are connected to the
unit, the HDMI control functions are enabled on the unit and the
external devices and “SCENE” in the “Setup” menu is set to
“On” for the corresponding SCENE, operations of the external
device may be reflected by switching SCENE as follows.
• TV is turned on.
• TV is switched to a video input source that is connected to the unit.
SET Complete
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
When the input source setting of each SCENE is changed, the
corresponding SCENE key setting on the remote control also
needs to be changed. Refer step 3 to configure the setting for
the remote control.
3 (If necessary) Press and hold the corresponding
SCENE key and input selection key together for
more than 3 seconds.
Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE/
RECEIVER blinks twice.
• External device starts playback.
• Apply the corresponding remote control code to the input selection key to
• The SCENE synchronization setting can be set for each SCENE. For details,
refer to the “SCENE” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu.
control the playback device with the unit’s remote control. For details on how
to apply the remote control code, refer to “Registering remote control codes
for external device operations” (p.79).
En
35
Enjoying the desired sound field effect
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and sound
decoders. Sound programs can make sounds richer, be played on
the stereo and more. Choose a sound program that sounds best
with the source you are playing back.
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
FM
Selecting suitable sound programs for movies (p.37)
USB
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
DIRECT
SCENE
CD
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
DIRECT
Press MOVIE repeatedly.
Selecting suitable sound programs for music or stereo
playback (p.38)
Press MUSIC repeatedly.
RADIO
Selecting the surround decoder (p.39)
OPTION
Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly.
VOLUME
Switching to the straight decoding mode (p.40)
DISPLAY
A
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
MODE
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to switch the straight decoding mode
between on and off.
Turning on the direct mode (p.40)
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
4
Press DIRECT repeatedly to switch the direct mode between on and
off.
Turning on Compressed Music Enhancer (p.40)
Press ENHANCER repeatedly to switch Compressed Music
Enhancer between on and off. Compressed Music Enhancer can be
also switched between on and off in the “Option” menu (p.60).
• The settings for sound programs and the surround decoder can be configured in
“DSP” (p.69) in the “Setup” menu.
• The sound program can be applied separately to each input.
• When playing back the audio that is DTS Express or has over a 96 kHz sampling
rate, straight decoding mode (p.40) turns on automatically.
• The speaker indicator on the front display (p.8) can be used to confirm which jack
is outputting audio currently.
En
36
Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP)
Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action
and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts
emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and
right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the
separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.
Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing
effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words
and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after
long hours of viewing.
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a
classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program
produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to
create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth.
This unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie
theaters or concert halls in your room.
Sound program categories “CINEMA DSP” lights up
VOL.
Sci-Fi
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
Programs
• When DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is played back, it is decoded by normal
❏ ENTERTAINMENT
DTS format.
■ Sound programs suitable for video contents (MOVIE)
Sound programs suitable for video contents, such as movies, TV programs and video
games are included.
Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and
studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the
voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the
center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimal space to
offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium.
Action Game
This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing, fighting
games and FPS games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects
makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing
for greater concentration.
Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a
more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects and dialog from a wide variety of
scenes.
Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a
more clear and spatial sound field.
Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of
pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live
space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of
vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
❏ MOVIE
Standard
This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without
disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as
Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of an ideal
movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right and rear.
Spectacle
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie
productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches
cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range
providing everything from very small sound effects to large, impressive
sounds.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a
variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialog, sound effects and background music.
En
37
■ Sound programs/stereo reproduction suitable for audio
contents (MUSIC)
Include suitable sound programs for listening to music sources such as CDs.
❏ CLASSICAL
Hall in Munich
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in
Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finish as a normal standard for
European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating
a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
Hall in Vienna
This sound program simulates an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized
concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and
ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the
audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
❏ LIVE/CLUB
Cellar Club
This program simulates a live venue with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the
listener is in a seat in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This is the sound field of a live rock music venue in Los Angeles, with
approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This is the sound field in front of the stage in The Bottom Line, a once famous
New York jazz club. The venue can seat 300 people ranging from left to right
in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
❏ STEREO
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2-channels. When
multi-channel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2-channels and
output from the front speakers. (CINEMA DSP is not used.)
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback
multi-channel sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2-channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
En
38
■ Enjoying more spatial sound fields
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
The CINEMA DSP 3D creates virtual speakers by using front
speakers, center speakers and surround speakers, which brings
you into a stereoscopic sound field.
When a sound program (except for 2ch stereo and 7ch stereo) is
selected, the CINEMA DSP 3D is turned on automatically in the
following situations:
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
• “Center” and “Surround” in the “Setup” menu are set to “Large” or
“Small” (p.65).
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
When using a surround decoder, audio sources can be played
back with up to 7.1-channel.
For details, refer to “Glossary” (p.88).
1 Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder.
By pressing SUR. DECODE repeatedly, the type of decoder
changes.
SUR.DECODE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
Enjoying multi-channel sounds (surround
decoder)
DIRECT
Pro Logic
CINEMA DSP 3D indicator lights up
SCENE
CD
VOL.
• “CINEMA DSP 3D” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” (p.69).
RADIO
VOL.
OPTION
3
VOLUME
Hall in Vienna
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
MUTE
• When headphones are connected, the CINEMA DSP 3D is not available.
PLII Movie
■ Enjoying sound programs without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
PLIIx Music
MODE
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
Pro Logic
PLIIx Movie
DISPLAY
A
POP-UP
MENU
SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
4
Without any surround speakers, only by using front side speakers,
the unit creates virtual speakers, which recreate the sound field
from the back automatically.
Select the sound program (except for 2ch stereo and 7ch stereo)
when surround speakers are not connected.
• When headphones are connected, the Virtual CINEMA DSP is not available.
Instead, SILENT CINEMA becomes effective (p.40).
PLII Music
PLIIx Game
PLII Game
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic
decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of audio sources.
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or
Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for
movies.
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or
Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for music.
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or
Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for
games.
Neo:6 Cinema
Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This
is suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music
Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This
is suitable for music.
• When headphones are connected or “Surround Back” is set to “None,” the Dolby
Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available.
En
39
Playback without sound field effects
(straight decoding mode)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
By using the straight decoding mode, sounds from each channel
included in input sources are output from each speaker without
sound field processing. When 2-channel sources such as CD are
selected, they are played back by stereo sound through the front
left and right speakers. When multi-channel playback sources are
selected, they are played back without applying sound field effects,
using an appropriate decoder.
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
DIRECT
SCENE
CD
RADIO
OPTION
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
DIRECT
1 Press STRAIGHT.
By pressing STRAIGHT repeatedly, the straight decoding
mode switches to enable and disable.
Playing back the compressed audio
dynamically (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer improves the sound by adding depth
and width and creates dynamic playback closer to the original
sound. This mode can be used along with CINEMA DSP.
1 Press ENHANCER.
By pressing ENHANCER repeatedly, Compressed Music
Enhancer switches to enable and disable.
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer is active.
VOL.
VOLUME
DISPLAY
A
POP-UP
MENU
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
TV VOL
MUTE
ENHANCER
VOL.
R
SR
Enhancer On
Playing back fidelity sound of the
selected source (direct mode)
1
INPUT
L
SL
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
MUTE
MODE
TV
STRAIGHT
SW
C
ENT
When the direct mode is enabled, the circuitry regardless of
playback (such as the front display or CINEMA DSP) is disabled to
reduce noise and play back and reproduce original sound.
• Compressed Music Enhancer is not available for the following audio formats:
- Signals with a sampling rate over 48 kHz
- High Definition Audio bitstream
TV CH
1 Press DIRECT.
• Compressed Music Enhancer can be also turned on/off in the “Option” menu
(p.60).
By pressing DIRECT repeatedly, the direct mode switches to
enable and disable.
VOL.
DIRECT
L
Enjoying surround audio with
headphones (SILENT CINEMA)
R
• When the direct mode is enabled, there are some restrictions as follows.
- Sound programs cannot be selected.
Connect headphones to the PHONES jack, and then select sound
programs and surround decoders. Even when headphones are
connected, you can enjoy a sound field.
- Tone control cannot be adjusted.
- The “Option” menu and “Setup” menu cannot be operated.
- Front display screen gets dimmer for reducing noise (during no operation).
En
40
Listening to FM/AM
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
When tuning a radio, select a frequency or a registered station.
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
FM
TUNER
FM
AM
USB
• To tune into the radio station, connect the antenna in advance (p.27).
• When the radio cannot get good reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna.
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
TUNING
TUNING
• FM/AM tuner frequencies will differ depending on the country or region where
the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models.
ENHANCER
CD
RADIO
Changing FM/AM tuner frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
OPTION
VOLUME
The factory pre-set FM/AM tuner frequency steps are 9 kHz for AM
and 50 kHz for FM. Carry out the following settings and select the
frequency steps suitable for your listening environment.
DISPLAY
A
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
TV
INPUT
MUTE
TV CH
Selecting a frequency for reception
DIRECT
SCENE
TV VOL
switch it on again.
The power turns on, with the settings you made configured.
AM
SLEEP
4 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select one of the
frequency steps.
5 Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then
ENT
Numeric keys
1 Switch this unit to the standby mode.
2 Press while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on
the front panel.
Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” (p.76) is
displayed on the front display.
After approximately a few seconds, the top menu items are
displayed.
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press FM or AM to select FM or AM to receive.
VOL.
FM87.50MHz
3 Select the frequency with the following keys.
TUNING: Selects a frequency.
Press and hold this key for approximately a second to search
for a station automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly with numbers (For
example, press “9,” “8,” “5” and “0” to select a station on
98.50 MHz.).
YPAO MIC
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
T
• “Wrong Station!” appears when a frequency is out of receivable range.
SCENE
A
BD
DVD
PHONES
USB
INPUT
TV
CD
PROGRAM
TONE CONTROL
RADIO
STRAIGHT
VOL.
SILENT CINEMA
STEREO
TUNED
iPod/iPhone
PROGRAM l / h
3 Press PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
repeatedly to display “TU.”
ENHANCER
iPod CHARGE
SLEEP
STEREO
TUNED
FM98.50MHz
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
“TUNED” lights up when a broadcast is received from a
station.
“STEREO” lights up when stereo broadcast is received from a
station.
TU - AM9/FM50
En
41
■ Receiving an FM broadcast that has a poor
signal
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
It may be possible to receive an unstable FM broadcast by
switching from stereo receiving to monaural receiving.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
1 Press MODE.
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUNING
TUNER
PRESET
VOL.
TUNED
FM Mode:Mono
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
By pressing MODE, the receiving mode is switched to
monaural or stereo.
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
SETUP
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
OPTION
DISPLAY
A
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MUTE
Registering favorite stations (Preset
tuning)
Up to 40 FM/AM stations can be registered as preset stations.
Registered stations can be chosen easily by selecting the preset
numbers.
4 Press ENTER.
READY
VOL.
01:FM 87.50MHz
5 (If necessary) To change the preset number from
which to start the Auto Preset function, press
PRESET or the cursor keys.
Auto Preset starts in approximately 5 seconds after the preset
number is selected.
When the preset number is not selected, “READY” appears on
the display, and then Auto Preset starts in approximately
5 seconds.
Selecting a preset number
READY
VOL.
02:FM 87.50MHz
Currently selected preset number
MODE
MODE
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
4
■ Registering FM stations automatically
Up to 40 FM stations with strong signals can be registered
automatically (Auto Preset).
• To cancel the Auto Preset, press RETURN.
During Auto Preset
SEARCH
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
• AM stations cannot be registered automatically. Use manual station preset (p.43).
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press OPTION.
OPTION
VOL.
Tone Control
3 Press the cursor keys (
OPTION
VOL.
02:FM 98.10MHz
During registration
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
02:FM98.50MHz
C
When Auto Preset is completed
FINISH
VOL.
Auto Preset
/ ) to select “Auto Preset.”
The “Option” menu closes automatically when registration is
completed.
VOL.
Auto Preset
En
42
■ Registering stations manually
CODE SET
Select stations manually and register them to the preset numbers.
SOURCE RECEIVER
1 Tune the station that you want to register, referring
to “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.41).
2 Press MEMORY for 2 seconds or longer.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUNING
TUNER
PRESET
MEMORY
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
The station is registered automatically to the preset number
“01” for the first registration. The station will be registered to the
next preset number after the one registered most recently after
the second registration.
DIRECT
SCENE
TV
CD
OPTION
SETUP
01:FM98.50MHz
RADIO
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
Preset number
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Cursor keys
• To select the preset number for registration, press MEMORY once while
MUTE
receiving the station that you want to register. Press PRESET or numeric
MODE
keys to select the preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
Numeric keys
01:Empty
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
TV
Empty, or the frequency currently registered
INPUT
TV VOL
02:FM87.50MHz
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
• When no stations are registered, “No presets” appears on the display.
• When an invalid preset number is input, “Wrong Num.” appears on the
display.
appears on the display.
Clear a radio station (preset station) registered to a preset number.
ENTER
DISPLAY
A
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
■ Clearing a registered station
OPTION
VOLUME
ENTER
After pressing PRESET once, numeric keys can be used for
inputting the preset number (01 to 40) directly.
• When the preset number that is not registered yet is entered, “Empty”
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
BD
DVD
2 Press PRESET to select the preset number.
TV CH
MUTE
■ Selecting a registered station
Choose the station that you want to listen to from stations that are
registered to the preset numbers.
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press OPTION.
OPTION
VOL.
Tone Control
3 Press the cursor keys (
/
) to display “Clear
Preset.”
OPTION
VOL.
Clear Preset
4 Press ENTER.
CLEAR
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
01:FM 98.50MHz
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
5 Press the cursor keys (
/ ) to select the preset
number that you want to clear, and then press
ENTER.
To clear multiple preset numbers, repeat the same procedure.
6 Press OPTION to finish this operation.
En
43
Radio Data System tuning
CODE SET
Frequency
SOURCE RECEIVER
(U.K. and Europe models only)
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
TUNER
TUNING
INFO
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
ENHANCER
SLEEP
DIRECT
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
SETUP
OPTION
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information
You can display the 4 types of the Radio Data System information:
“Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text,” “Clock Time.”
SCENE
BD
DVD
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. This unit can receive various Radio Data
System data such as “Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio
Text,” “Clock Time” when receiving Radio Data System
broadcasting stations.
Cursor keys
1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend that you use the automatic preset tuning to tune into the
Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.42).
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
10
4
8
ENT
2 Press INFO repeatedly until the desired information
is displayed.
TV
INPUT
MUTE
VOL.
CLASSICS
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
Program Type
TV CH
Information on the display changes as you press the key. The
kind of information is displayed for a while and then the
information is displayed.
Type of information
Program Service
Text,” or “Clock Time” is displayed. That shows this unit is receiving data (or
stopping receiving data). If the data is receivable, the corresponding information is
displayed after a while.
• “Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time” do not appear
when the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service.
■ Automatic traffic information reception
When the tuner is active, this unit can automatically search for and
receive transmission from traffic information broadcast stations.
MUTE
MODE
TV VOL
9850
• “PTY Wait,” “RT Wait,” or “CT Wait” may appear when “Program Type,” “Radio
PRESET
MOVIE
Front display (when “Program Type” selected)
Description
Displays the name of the Radio Data System
program service currently being received.
Program Type
Displays the type of the Radio Data System program
currently being received.
Radio Text
Displays the information on the Radio Data System
program currently being received.
Clock Time
Displays the current time.
DSP Program
Displays the currently selected sound program.
Audio Decoder
Displays the currently selected surround decoder.
Frequency
Displays the received tuner frequency.
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press OPTION.
OPTION
ENHANCER
SLEEP
iPod CHARGE
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
MUTE
PL
L
SL
Tone Control
3 Press the cursor keys (
/
SW
C
PR
R
SR
) to select
“TrafficProgram.”
OPTION
ENHANCER
iPod CHARGE
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
VOL.
MUTE
TrafficProgram
PL
L
SL
SW
C
PR
R
SR
Continues to the
next page
En
44
4 Press ENTER to start the search function.
CODE SET
1
2
3
OPTION
READY
HDMI
4
ENHANCER
iPod CHARGE
SLEEP
STEREO
TUNED
PL
L
SL
SW
C
PR
R
SR
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
FM
USB
TUNER
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
TUNING
The transmission search will begin upward from the current
frequency in approximately 5 seconds. Or, when the status
indicator reads “READY,” you can begin the search
immediately by pressing ENTER.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
DIRECT
BD
DVD
TV
CD
OPTION
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
2
5
6
9
3
4
/
) to start a search in
a search automatically starts upward.
TUNER
TV
VOL.
5 Press the cursor keys (
): Searches upward from the current frequency.
- Cursor key (
): Searches downward from the current frequency.
When a traffic station is found, it will appear on the display and
the “Option” menu will close.
ENHANCER
iPod CHARGE
STEREO
TUNED
SLEEP
/ ) to select the desired
input video source.
- Cursor key (
FINISH
0
VOL.
4 Press ENTER.
TUNER
VOL.
Video;;;;HDMI1
MODE
1
) to select “Video Out.”
Video;;;;;;Off
• When the status is “READY,” use the cursor keys (
the specified direction. If no operation is performed for more than 5 seconds,
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
/
Video Out
RADIO
VOLUME
ENTER
OPTION
“Option” menu.
OPTION
SETUP
3 Press the cursor keys (
• By pressing RETURN right before or during a search, it will return to the
SCENE
VOL.
Tone Control
VOL.
TP FM 87.50MHz
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
2 Press OPTION.
Status
SOURCE RECEIVER
Selectable video inputs
VOL.
MUTE
TP FM101.30MHz
PL
L
SL
SW
C
PR
R
SR
INPUT
HDMI1-5
A video signal input from HDMI1-5 is output.
AV1-6
A video signal input from AV1-6 is output.
V-AUX
A video signal input from the VIDEO AUX jack on the
front display panel is output. When the external
devices are connected to both HDMI IN jack and
VIDEO jack of the VIDEO AUX, the video signals input
from the HDMI IN jack are output.
Off (default)
No video signals input from external devices is output.
TV VOL
MUTE
Traffic information broadcast station (Frequency)
• If the receiver cannot find a traffic station, “TP Not Found” will appear on the
display, and the “Option” menu will shortly close.
Combining audio from the radio with
video from an external device
6 Press OPTION to finish this operation.
While listening to the radio, favorite videos can be output on a TV
monitor.
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source, and then choose the station that you want to
listen to.
En
45
Playing back songs with iPod
By using the USB cable supplied with iPod, optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such
as YDS-12) or optional Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10), play back songs from
connected iPod with the unit.
• In this manual, both iPod and iPhone are collectively represented as “iPod.” When there is no explanation
■ Using a USB cable to connect an iPod
Connect the iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod.
Features
that is specific to either of them, “iPod” means both iPod and iPhone.
• Some functions may not be available depending on types or versions of iPod, or depending on types of
docks.
• Enjoying clear sounds by transmitting the digital audio signals input from iPod.
• Operating iPod using the unit’s remote control.
Functional differences depending on the way of connection
• Displaying the content list and playback informations of the iPod on a TV monitor.
USB cable supplied
with iPod
Yamaha iPod universal
dock
(such as YDS-12)
Audio output
✓
✓
✓
Video output
—
✓
—
Operation with
remote control of
the unit
✓
✓
—
Operation with
iPod
✓
✓
✓
Operation on TV
monitor
✓
✓
—
Charging
✓
✓
✓
Charging during
standby mode
—
✓
✓
Supported iPod
Connecting an iPod
Yamaha iPod wireless
system
(YID-W10)
Supported iPod
iPod touch, iPod nano (2 gen. to 6 gen.), iPod classic, iPhone4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G,
iPhone
Procedure
Connect an iPod as follows.
iPod touch
iPod nano (2 gen. to
6 gen.)
iPod classic
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone
iPod touch
iPod nano
iPod classic
iPod with video
iPod with color display
iPod with click wheel
iPod mini
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone
1 Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
iPod touch
iPod nano
iPod classic
iPod with video
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone
Continues to the
next page
En
46
2 Connect the USB cable to the USB port on the front
CODE SET
panel.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Procedure
Connect an iPod as follows. Refer to the manual for iPod dock also.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
PHONES
INPUT
USB
TONE CONTROL
• For connecting iPhone, use the YDS-12.
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
SILENT CINEMA
iPod/iPhone
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
1 Turn the unit to the standby mode, and then connect
the iPod dock to the DOCK jack.
DOCK
USB
Keep the iPod dock as far away from the unit as possible.
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
VOL.
ENHANCER
SLEEP
Connected
SCENE
CD
ARC
DIRECT
L
SL
SW
C
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
ANTENNA
DOCK
R
SR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AM
FM
PR
RADIO
75Ω
OPTION
VOLUME
DISPLAY
A
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
3 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
4 Select the content of the iPod, and then start
• To operate with iPod itself (p.52)
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
10
4
8
ENT
TV VOL
TV CH
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT
L
R
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
The unit (rear)
Yamaha iPod universal dock
2 Connect the iPod to the iPod dock, and then turn on
this unit.
• Video signals cannot be output using the USB cable supplied with iPod.
TV
INPUT
VIDEO
Y
playback.
• To operate with a TV monitor (p.49)
MODE
PB
• If noises are heard while using iPhone, change the position of the iPhone.
MUTE
■ Using the iPod dock to connect an iPod
Connect the iPod to the unit with the optional Yamaha iPod universal
dock.
DOCK
VOL.
iPodconnected
L
SL
R
SR
3 Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source.
4 Select the content of the iPod, and then start
Features
playback.
• Playing back not only songs but also video.
• To operate with a TV monitor (p.49)
• Operating iPod using the unit’s remote control.
• To operate with iPod itself (p.52)
• Displaying the content list and playback informations of the iPod on a
TV monitor.
SW
C
• When the iPod is connected to the iPod dock, the iPod can be charged.
Supported iPod
You can set whether or not to charge the iPod when the unit is in the standby
iPod touch, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod with video, iPod with color
display, iPod with click wheel, iPod mini, iPhone4, iPhone 3GS,
iPhone 3G, iPhone
mode, in “Standby Charge” (p.62) on the “Option” menu.
En
47
■ Using the iPod wireless system to connect
an iPod
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Connect the iPod to the unit with the optional Yamaha iPod wireless
system.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
3 Connect the iPod to the iPod wireless system
(transmitter).
Wait for a while until the following display appears on the front
display.
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
VOL.
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
FM
USB
AM
PRESET
INFO
TUNING
MEMORY
Features
DOCK
• Connecting iPod to the unit wirelessly and playing back audio source
in real time without reducing the quality.
• Volume level or power-on/off operation of the unit can be linked
synchronized with operations of iPod itself.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENHANCER
SLEEP
DIRECT
Supported iPod
RADIO
iPod touch, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod with video, iPhone4,
iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
SCENE
CD
OPTION
VOLUME
DISPLAY
A
MUTE
MODE
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
TV
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
4 Select the content with the iPod, and then start
playback.
The unit turns on automatically, and then “DOCK” is selected
as the input source.
• The video or content list of iPod cannot be displayed on a TV monitor.
Procedure
POP-UP
MENU
iPodconnected
4
• You can set whether operations for iPod link with operations for the unit
Connect an iPod as follows. The iPod can be controlled using iPod
itself. Refer to the manual for iPod wireless system also.
(turning on/off, selecting input sources, and adjusting volume level) in “iPod
1 Disconnect the power cable plug from the outlet,
function is set to “Off,” operations for the unit such as turning on and
and then connect the iPod wireless system
(receiver) to the DOCK jack.
Interlock (Interlock)” (p.62) on the “Option” menu. When the interlock
selecting the input source, should be controlled manually.
• When putting a transmitter connected to the iPod on a receiver, iPod is
charged automatically. You can set whether or not to charge iPod when the
Keep the iPod wireless system as far away from the unit as
possible.
INPUT
unit is in standby mode, in “Standby Charge” (p.62) on the “Option” menu.
CAUTION
TV VOL
MUTE
• When using iPod to adjust the volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud,
which causes damage to the unit and speakers. In this case, remove the iPod
ARC
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
ANTENNA
DOCK
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AM
from the iPod wireless system (transmitter) immediately. Set the restriction for
FM
the maximum volume level in “Max Volume” on “Setup” menu to prevent
PR
75Ω
PB
VIDEO
excessively loud playback.
Y
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT
L
R
12
A
3
B
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
The unit (rear)
Yamaha iPod wireless
system (Receiver)
2 Connect the power cable plug to the outlet.
En
48
Controlling while watching a TV monitor
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
When connecting iPod with a USB cable or iPod dock, iPod can be
controlled with the TV monitor.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
2 Press the cursor keys to select the content, and then
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
After selecting a song, playback starts and the Now Playing
view appears.
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
• To operate an iPod on a TV monitor, connect the unit and TV with an HDMI cable,
TUNER
FM
USB
DOCK
USB
and change the input source on the TV to the video input from HDMI OUT jack of
the unit before operation.
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
• An iPod connected to the iPod wireless system cannot be operated on a TV
TUNING
monitor.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
1 Select the input source to which the iPod is
DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
connected.
RADIO
When using the USB cable to connect the iPod:
OPTION
SETUP
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Cursor keys
When using the iPod dock to connect the iPod:
• Press RETURN or the cursor key (
) to return to the previous screen.
Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source.
MUTE
The following display is for the USB input source.
MODE
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
10
4
8
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
MUTE
• When “No device” appears on the TV monitor, make sure that the iPod is
connected to the unit properly.
En
49
■ Browse view
CODE SET
■ Now Playing view
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
SETUP
1 Play icon
1 Play icon
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
MODE
Settings for shuffle playback and repeat playback (p.51) and playback
status (playback/pause) are displayed.
2
5
6
9
0
3
TV VOL
List of iPod contents is displayed. Press the cursor keys to select the
content, and then press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Current menu number/Numbers of all menu items
TV
INPUT
4
5 Operation menu icon
Press the cursor keys to select the item, and then press ENTER to execute
the selection.
Menu
Settings for shuffle playback and repeat playback (p.51) and playback
status (playback/pause) are displayed.
2 Song information
2 List name
3 Content list
1
MUTE
Cursor keys
The name of an artist, an album and a song and elapsed time/remaining
time are displayed. Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item to be
scrolled.
3 Album image
4 Operation menu icon
Press the cursor keys to select the item, and then press ENTER to confirm
the selection.
Menu
Explanation
Explanation
Starts or pauses playback.
10 Pages Up
Goes 10 pages backwards.
Playback
Control
1 Page Up
Skips to the beginning of the song now playing,
or to the song previously playing.
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Down
Goes 10 pages forwards.
Return
Returns to the previous display.
Now Playing
Switches the display to the Now Playing view. When
playing no contents, this menu is not available.
Screen Off
Closes the Browse view. Press ENTER or RETURN to
display the Now Playing view while song or video
content is being played back. If no content is being
played back, the Browse view is displayed.
Skips to the beginning of the next song.
Browse
Switches the display to the Browse view.
Screen Off
Closes the Now Playing view. Press ENTER or
RETURN to return to the Now Playing view.
• iPod can be controlled with the external device operation keys on remote control
(p.51).
• If “View ON SCREEN” appears on the front display when controlling iPod viewing
only the front display, press the cursor key (
) to return to control screen.
En
50
■ Controlling with the remote control
CODE SET
HDMI
1
2
3
Available remote
control keys
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
DOCK
USB
ENHANCER
DIRECT
VOL.
Parameters
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
Explanations
Off
Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs
Plays back songs in random order.
Shuffle icon appears on the Now Playing
view (p.50).
Albums
Plays back albums in random order.
Shuffle icon appears on the Now Playing
view (p.50).
Skips to the beginning of the now playing song,
or to the previous playing song.
Off
Turns off the repeat function.
Skips to the next song.
One
Plays back a song repeatedly.
Repeat One icon appears on the Now
Playing view (p.50).
All
Plays back all songs in a directory.
Repeat All icon appears on the Now
Playing view (p.50).
Shuffle
TUNING
MUSIC
SLEEP
Items
Pauses playback.
External
device
operation keys
/ ) to adjust the setting.
Repeat;;;;;One
Starts playing back the selected song.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Explanations
Stops playback.
PRESET
DOCK
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
4 Press the cursor keys (
Without using “operation menu icon” on the Now Playing view, iPod
can be operated directly with the remote control.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Searches backwards, while the button is
pressed.
Searches forwards, while the button is pressed.
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
SETUP
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
OPTION
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
MUTE
Repeat
■ Shuffle/repeat playback
Make a setting for playing iPod in random order or repeatedly.
MODE
External device
operation keys
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
ENT
1 Select “USB” or “DOCK” as the input source, and
then press OPTION.
OPTION
5 Press OPTION to close the menu.
VOL.
Tone Control
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
MUTE
2 Press the cursor keys (
/ ) to select “Shuffle” or
“Repeat.”
OPTION
VOL.
Repeat
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
3 Press ENTER.
DOCK
VOL.
Repeat;;;;;Off
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
• Press RETURN to return to the previous display while operating the menu.
En
51
Controlling by iPod itself
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Control iPod to play contents.
HDMI
1
2
3
1 Press MODE.
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
The display on the TV monitor disappears, and then operations
can be controlled by the iPod.
Press MODE again to return to the TV display (the Browse
view.)
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUNING
2 Select the content with the iPod, and then start
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
playback.
DIRECT
For details on operation with the iPod, refer to the operation
manual of your iPod.
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
SETUP
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
MUTE
MODE
MODE
External device
operation keys
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
10
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
■ Controlling with the remote control
iPod can be operated directly with the remote control.
Available remote
control keys
Explanations
Selects the content.
Cursor keys
4
8
ENTER/
Cursor key (
)
RETURN/
Cursor key (
)
Confirms the selected menu.
ENT
Returns to the previous menu.
MUTE
Starts or pauses playing back the selected song.
Stops playback.
External
device
operation keys
Searches backwards, while the button is
pressed.
Searches forwards, while the button is pressed.
Skips to the beginning of the now playing song,
or to the previous playing song.
Skips to the next song.
En
52
Playing back songs with Bluetooth devices
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
DOCK
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
MEMORY
ENHANCER
OPTION
VOLUME
ENTER
eight Bluetooth devices. When the ninth device is paired, the pairing setting for the
devices.) Once pairing is completed, communication between the Bluetooth device
device which has not been used for the longest period will be deleted.
MUTE
Therefore, when Bluetooth devices are connected, they need to be paired with the
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
POP-UP
MENU
• The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) can be paired with up to
the first time, it is necessary to do pairing (registration for matching two Bluetooth
and the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver is established by only connecting them.
RADIO
OPTION
RETURN
• When connecting your Bluetooth device to a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver for
DIRECT
SCENE
CD
Pairing Bluetooth devices
Connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver
MODE
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
INPUT
4
1 Turn the unit to standby mode, and then connect the
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver to the DOCK jack.
TV
When your Bluetooth device is connected to a Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver for the first time, or the pairing settings are deleted, it
is necessary to do pairing.
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
SLEEP
Use an optional Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as
YBA-10) to play back songs with Bluetooth devices. Refer to the
manual for the Bluetooth receivers or your Bluetooth devices also.
This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
Bluetooth profile.
Keep the distance from the unit to the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver as far as possible.
TV VOL
MUTE
1 Press DOCK to select the “DOCK” as the input
source.
2 Turn on the Bluetooth device, and then set to the
pairing mode.
3 Press OPTION and then press the cursor keys ( /
)
repeatedly to select “Pairing,” and then press
ENTER.
The searching for the device starts. When the Bluetooth device
recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver, the name of
device (such as “YBA-10 YAMAHA”) appears on the Bluetooth
device list.
VOL.
ARC
HDMI OUT
DOCK
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
ANTENNA
DOCK
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AM
Searching...
FM
PR
75Ω
PB
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT
L
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV 1
AV 2
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 3
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
• Press RETURN to cancel the searching.
• Instead of the step 3, it is also possible to press and hold MEMORY to start
R
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
the searching. To cancel the searching, press MEMORY again.
The unit (rear)
Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver
2 Turn on the unit.
Continues to the
next page
En
53
4 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from
CODE SET
the Bluetooth device list, and then enter a pass key
“0000.”
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
When the pairing is completed, “Completed” appears.
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
DOCK
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
DOCK
L
SL
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
SLEEP
TUNING
R
SR
VOL.
BTconnected
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
• Depending on Bluetooth devices, “BT connected” appears after pairing. In
this case, at the same time with pairing, wired connection is also completed.
receiver, the Bluetooth device, which has the Bluetooth function enabled and
ENHANCER
Therefore, only by starting playback with the Bluetooth device, audio output
was connected most recently, is automatically connected to the Bluetooth
from the unit automatically.
wireless audio receiver. When the device wireless audio receiver is
TV
CD
DIRECT
RADIO
OPTION
SETUP
OPTION
DISPLAY
A
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
Cursor keys
MODE
ENTER
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
10
5 Press OPTION to close the menu.
Playing back songs by connecting to the
Bluetooth device
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
4
8
connect them by operating Bluetooth device.
• ”Not found” appears when the wireless connection is not established.
Confirm the following, and then retry the connection.
- Both the Bluetooth device and the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver are
- The Bluetooth device is turned on, and the Bluetooth function of that device
is set to enable.
- The Bluetooth device is within 10 m (32 ft.) from the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver.
4 Play back songs with the Bluetooth device.
ENT
TV
TV CH
connected to another device, disable the Bluetooth function of the device or
paired.
When pairing is completed, perform the wireless connection
between the Bluetooth device and the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver. While connecting, when playback is started with the
Bluetooth device, audio is output from the unit.
INPUT
TV VOL
• When some Bluetooth devices are paired with the Bluetooth wireless audio
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
SCENE
MUTE
When the wireless connection is completed, “BT connected”
appears.
USB
FM
BD
DVD
Completed
/ ) repeatedly to select
“Connect,” and then press ENTER.
DOCK
VOL.
SW
C
3 Press the cursor keys (
• Depending on the Bluetooth device, a wireless connection is established
automatically by controlling the Bluetooth device. In this case, following steps from
2-3 is unnecessary.
• Select “Disconnect” in step 3 to disconnect the wireless connection.
1 Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source.
2 Press OPTION.
En
54
Playing back songs with USB storage devices
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
When a USB device is connected to the unit, audio files in the
device, such as WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA and MPEG-4
AAC, can be played back.
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
FM
USB
USB
Controlling while watching a TV monitor
While watching a TV monitor, selecting songs and playback are
operated.
• This unit is compatible with sampling frequency of up to 48 kHz for USB storage
AM
PRESET
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
devices.
TUNING
and change the input source on the TV to the video input from HDMI OUT jack of
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
Connecting a USB storage device
DIRECT
SCENE
CD
VOLUME
ENTER
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
MUTE
the unit before operation.
This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT
32 format, except USB HDDs). Refer to the manual for your USB
device also.
RADIO
OPTION
RETURN
• To operate a USB storage device, connect the unit and a TV with an HDMI cable,
1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
1 Connect the USB storage device to the USB port on
the front panel.
MODE
YPAO MIC
INFO
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
MEMORY
4
BD
DVD
• When “No device” appears on the TV monitor, make sure that the USB
TV
INPUT
PHONES
USB
INPUT
TONE CONTROL
storage device is connected to the unit properly.
TV VOL
MUTE
SILENT CINEMA
iPod/iPhone
2 Press the cursor keys to select a folder (directory) or
a song, and then press ENTER.
After selecting a song, playback starts and the Now Playing
view appears.
• Confirm that the USB storage device is facing the correct way when inserted
into the USB port.
• For details on connecting an iPod, refer to “Using a USB cable to connect an
iPod” (p.46).
• When connecting the USB storage device that contents many data files, it
may takes long time to load the files. During loading files, “Loading…” is
displayed on the front panel and TV monitor.
• Press RETURN or the cursor key (
) to return to the previous screen.
• Files that are not compatible with the unit are not displayed.
En
55
CODE SET
■ Browse view
■ Now Playing view
1 Play icon
1 Play icon
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
DIRECT
SCENE
CD
RADIO
OPTION
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Cursor keys
MUTE
Settings for random playback and repeat playback (p.57) and playback
status (playback/pause) are displayed.
2 List name
2 Song information
3 Song list
MODE
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
TV
4
The list of songs and folders is displayed (with up to 32 characters). Press
the cursor keys to select a song, and then press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
4 Current song number/Numbers of all songs
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
Settings for random playback and repeat playback (p.57) and playback
status (playback/pause) are displayed.
The name of an artist, an album and a song tagged with the file and
elapsed time are displayed. Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select an
item to be scrolled.
3 Operation menu icon
Press the cursor keys to select the item, and then press ENTER to confirm
the selection.
5 Operation menu icon
Menus
Press the cursor keys to select the item, and then press ENTER to confirm
the selection.
Menus
10 Pages Up
Explanations
Explanations
Starts or pauses playback.
Playback
Control
10 pages backwards.
Skips to the beginning of the next song.
Skips to the beginning of the song now playing,
or to the song previously playing.
1 Page Up
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
Browse
Switches the display to the Browse view.
Screen Off
Closes the Now Playing view. Press ENTER or
RETURN to return to the Now Playing view.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Down
Goes 10 pages forwards.
Return
Returns to the previous display.
Now Playing
Switches the display to the Now Playing view.
When playing no songs, this menu is not available.
Screen Off
Closes the Browse view. Press ENTER or RETURN to
display the Now Playing view while song or video
content is being played back. If no content is being
played back, the Browse view is displayed.
• USB devices can be controlled with the external device operation keys on remote
control (p.57).
• If “View ON SCREEN” appears on the front display when controlling contents on
the USB storage device viewing only the front display, press the cursor key (
) to
return to control screen.
En
56
■ Controlling with the remote control
CODE SET
HDMI
1
2
3
Enables remote
control keys
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
FM
USB
INFO
External
device
operation keys
MUSIC
ENHANCER
SLEEP
DIRECT
SCENE
CD
OPTION
OPTION
USB
Searches backwards, while the button is
pressed.
RETURN
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
MODE
External device
operation keys
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
Items
■ Repeat/random playback
Make a setting for playing a USB device repeatedly or in random
order.
TV VOL
MUTE
• When connecting an iPod with a USB cable, the settings of shuffle playback are
available in addition to the repeat playback (p.51).
1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
2 Press OPTION.
OPTION
3 Press the cursor keys (
Repeat
SW
C
R
SR
Parameters
Explanations
Turns off the repeat function.
Single
Plays back a song repeatedly.
Repeat Single icon appears on the Now
Playing view (p.56).
All
Plays back all songs in a folder (directory).
Repeat All icon appears on the Now
Playing view (p.56).
Random
Plays back songs in random order.
Random icon appears on the Now Playing
view (p.56).
Repeat
6 Press OPTION to close the menu.
VOL.
Tone Control
OPTION
L
SL
Off
4
TV
INPUT
/ ) to adjust the setting.
Repeat;;Single
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
TOP
MENU
R
SR
VOL.
Skips to the next song.
VOLUME
ENTER
SW
C
Searches forwards, while the button is pressed.
Skips to the beginning of the song now playing,
or to the song previously playing.
RADIO
L
SL
• Press RETURN to return to the previous display while operating the menu.
5 Press the cursor keys (
Pauses playback.
Stops playback.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Repeat;;;;;Off
TUNING
MEMORY
VOL.
Explanation
Starts playing back the selected song.
USB
AM
PRESET
USB
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
4 Press ENTER.
Without using the “operation menu icon” on the Now Playing view,
USB devices can be operated directly with the remote control.
SOURCE RECEIVER
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
/ ) to select “Repeat.”
VOL.
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
En
57
Combining a song from a USB storage
device (iPod) with video from an external
device
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
USB
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
TV
CD
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
MODE
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
Cursor keys
ENTER
DISPLAY
A
TOP
MENU
A video signal input from HDMI1-5 is output.
AV1-6
A video signal input from AV1-6 is output.
V-AUX
A video signal input from the VIDEO AUX jack on the
front display panel is output. When the external devices
are connected to both HDMI IN jack and VIDEO jack of
the VIDEO AUX, the video signals input from the HDMI
IN jack are output.
Off (default)
No signal is output.
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
6 Press OPTION to finish this operation.
OPTION
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
VOL.
Tone Control
RADIO
OPTION
SETUP
1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source, and
then play back your desired song.
2 Press OPTION.
OPTION
DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
HDMI1-5
While listening to a song from a USB device, favorite videos can be
output on the TV monitor.
A
AV
1
Selectable video inputs
4
3 Press the cursor keys (
OPTION
/ ) to select “Video Out.”
Video Out
• When the Browse view and Now Playing view is displayed on a TV monitor, close
the screen with “
VOL.
L
SL
SW
C
.”
• “Video Out” is also available for iPod connected to the USB port.
R
SR
4 Press ENTER.
USB
VOL.
Video;;;;;;Off
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
MUTE
5 Press the cursor keys (
/ ) to select the desired
input video source.
USB
VOL.
Video;;;;V-AUX
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
En
58
Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (Option menu)
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Depending on the input source, configure settings for the function
related to playback. An operation for settings is possible with only
the front display without using a TV monitor. Therefore, settings can
be changed easily as needed.
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
FM
• Only the available settings that can be applied to the selected input are displayed.
USB
Item
• To operate the “Option” menu on the TV monitor, connect the unit and a TV with an
AM
PRESET
INFO
TUNING
HDMI cable, and change the input source on the TV to the video input from HDMI
MEMORY
MUSIC
ENHANCER
SLEEP
1 Press OPTION.
DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
SETUP
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Cursor keys
OPTION
Tone Control
VOL.
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
Front display
MUTE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
TV
60
Adaptive DRC
Sets whether dynamic range (from maximum
to minimum) is adjusted automatically in
conjunction with adjusting the volume level.
60
Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music
Enhancer.
60
Volume Trim
Adjusts the differences of the volume levels
when switching the input source.
60
Selects the 5.1 to 7.1-channel signal playback
Extended Surround method when surround back speakers are
used.
61
Signal Info
Displays information on the current video and
audio signal.
61
Audio In
Combines video from the selected input
source with audio input from other jacks.
25
Video Out
Combines audio of the TUNER or USB input
with video from other input.
Auto Preset
Registers FM stations with strong signals
automatically in the preset numbers (up to 40).
42
Clear Preset
Deletes the registered stations.
43
Traffic Program
(U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically
searches for traffic information with the Radio
Data System.
44
Repeat
Sets repeat playback of an iPod or USB
device.
Shuffle
Sets shuffle playback of an iPod.
51
Standby Charge
Sets whether or not to charge an iPod while
the unit is in standby mode.
62
iPod Interlock
Sets whether operations for the iPod
connected to the iPod wireless audio receiver
are in conjunction with operations for the unit.
62
Pairing
Pairs Bluetooth devices with the Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver.
53
Connect/
Disconnect
Connects or disconnects a wireless
connection between Bluetooth devices with
the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
54
INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
MUTE
TV monitor
2 Press the cursor keys (
/ ) to select the desired
setting, and then press ENTER.
• Press RETURN to return to the previous screen.
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to adjust the setting.
4 Press OPTION to finish the setting.
Page
Tone Control
MODE
1
Description
Adjusts the high-frequency range and lowfrequency range of sounds.
OUT jack of the unit before operation.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Available settings in Option menu
45, 58
51, 57
En
59
■ Tone Control
■ Enhancer
Adjusts the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range
(Bass) of sounds output from the front speakers. When headphones are connected,
adjusts the balance of the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds
output from headphones.
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.40).
Input sources
All (the setting is applied to all input sources)
Choices
High frequency range (Treble), Low-frequency range (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to + 6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Input sources
All (the setting is applied to each input source)
Settings
Off
Turns off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode.
On
Turns on the Compressed Music Enhancer mode.
• Compressed Music Enhancer can be enabled/disabled with ENHANCER on the remote control as well.
Default setting
Bypass (0.0 dB)
■ Volume Trim
• When you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well.
The tone control can also be adjusted with the keys on the front panel (p.7).
a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass.”
b Press PROGRAM to adjust the setting.
■ Adaptive DRC
Sets whether dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is adjusted automatically in
conjunction with adjusting the volume level.
When it is set to “On,” it is useful for listening to playback at low volume at night.
Corrects the volume differences between each input source. Adjust the parameter to
reduce any change in volume when switching between input sources.
Input sources
All (the setting is applied to each input source)
• Adjusted value is separately applied to the selected input.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default setting
0.0 dB
Input sources
All (the setting is applied to all input sources)
Settings
Off (Default)
Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically
On
Adjusts the dynamic range automatically
On
Off
Input Level
Volume: low
Output Level
Output Level
When it is set to “On,” the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low level volume, and
becomes wide at a high level volume.
On
Off
Input Level
Volume: high
En
60
■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)
■ Signal Info
Selects the 5.1 to 7.1-channel signal playback method when surround back speakers
are used.
Displays information on the current video and audio signals.
Input sources
HDMI1-5, AV1-4, V-AUX and the input source set as a TV audio input when ARC is used
Input sources
HDMI1-5, AV1-4, V-AUX and the input source set as a TV audio input when ARC is used
Items
Settings
Auto (Default)
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder and reproduces the
signal in 6.1 or 7.1-channel when audio including a flag for surround
back channel is output. However, when the DTS or DTS-HD signal in 5.1
or 6.1-channel is input, the unit reproduces the signal in 7.1-channel
despite a flag for surround back channel.
(
PLIIx Movie
PLIIxMo)
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Movie decoder. (It is available only when two surround back speakers
are connected.)
(
PLIIx Music
PLIIxMu)
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. (It is available when the number of connected
surround back speakers is one or more.)
EX/ES
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder and always reproduces
the signal in 6.1 or 7.1-channel.
Off
Always reproduces original channels.
Format
(FORMAT)
Audio signal format.
When this unit is unable to detect a digital signal, it automatically
switches to an analog input.
Channel
(CHAN)
The number of source channels in the input signal (front/ surround/
LFE).
For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels
and LFE.
If a channel that cannot be expressed as the above, a total number of
channels such as “5.1ch” may be displayed.
Sampling
(SAMPL)
The number of samples taken per second when converting an analog
signal into a digital signal.
Bitrate
(B RATE)
The number of bits passing a given point per second.
Input
(V IN)
Video input signal format
Output
(V OUT)
Video output signal format.
Error messages about HDMI. This item appears only when error
concerning HDMI occurs.
Message
(V MSG)
HDCP Error (HDCP Error):
The connected TV is not compliant to the High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection (HDCP). Make sure that the HDCP compliant TV is
connected.
Device Over (Device Over):
The number of devices connected to HDMI OUT jack exceeded the
limitation. Reduce the number of the connected devices.
■ Procedure to switch the items on the front display.
1 Press the cursor keys (
Selected item
FORMAT
/
) to switch the display of information on the front display.
Signal information
VOL.
Dolby D
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
Front display
• The list of all signal information is displayed on a TV monitor.
En
61
■ Standby Charge
■ iPod Interlock (Interlock)
Sets whether or not to charge an iPod connected to the iPod dock or iPod wireless
audio receiver while the unit is in standby mode.
Sets whether operations for the iPod connected to the iPod wireless audio receiver are
in linked with operations for the unit.
Input sources
DOCK (iPod)
Input sources
DOCK (iPod)
Settings
On (Default)
Charges iPod when the unit is in standby mode.
Off
Does not charge iPod when the unit is in standby mode.
• This setting is available only when the iPod wireless audio receiver is connected.
❏ Power & Input (Pwr&Input)
Sets the operation for iPod related to the operation for the unit when adjusting the
volume level, such as being turned on and selecting the input source.
• When iPod is connected to the unit with a USB cable, iPod cannot be charged while the unit is in standby
mode.
Settings
Off
Turns off the interlock function.
On (Default)
Turns on the interlock function. When starting playback with the iPod,
the unit is turned on, and then “DOCK” is selected as the input source.
When a few minutes pass after playback is stopped, the unit goes into
standby mode.
❏ Volume
Sets whether the operation for iPod relates to the operation for the unit when adjusting
the volume level.
Settings
Off
Turns off the interlock function.
On (Default)
Turns on the interlock function. When adjusting the volume level with an
iPod, the volume level of the unit is also adjusted.
En
62
CONFIGURATIONS
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
The settings of the unit can be changed from the “Setup” menu
displayed on the TV screen.
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNING
) to select an item (p.64)
• Connect the unit and a TV with an HDMI cable to display the “Setup” menu. If the
TV is not connected with an HDMI cable, reconnect it with an HDMI cable.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
ENHANCER
SLEEP
1 Press SETUP.
DIRECT
SCENE
BD
DVD
/
and press ENTER.
USB
FM
MOVIE
3 Press the cursor keys (
TV
CD
RADIO
OPTION
SETUP
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
MUTE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
A
ENT
When the HDMI control function is enabled on both the unit and
a TV that supports the HDMI control, the TV may automatically
operate as follows when SETUP is pressed.
• The TV turns on.
• The video input on the TV is switched to the HDMI input connected
to the unit.
• The “Setup” menu is displayed on the TV screen.
2 Press the cursor keys (
), a detail
setting menu is displayed. Press RETURN to close the detail settings menu
and return to the previous menu screen.
/ ) to select the menu you
want to configure.
Menu items
• When pressing ENTER to select an item that has a folder icon (
Selected item
4 Press the cursor keys (
/
setting and press ENTER.
/ / ) to adjust the
MUTE
Selected menu
Current settings and folders
• Operation procedures vary depending on selected items. For details, refer to
• Menus can be selected while the menu cursor is displayed (white box around
the menu icon). When configuring the settings, press RETURN repeatedly to
be able to select menus.
the directions for each setting item.
5 Press SETUP to close the “Setup” menu.
• For details on settings in the “Setup” menu, refer to the “Setup menu list”
(p.64).
En
63
Setup menu list
Menu
Configuration
Item
Description
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
65
Center
Selects the size of the center speaker and whether or not to use the speaker.
65
Surround
Selects the size of the surround speakers and whether or not to use the speakers.
65
Surround Back
Selects the size of the surround back speakers and whether or not to use the speakers.
65
Selects the phase of the subwoofer signals.
66
Phase
Speaker
Subwoofer
Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component produced from speakers set to “Small.”
Extra Bass
Selects the speaker to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Page
66
66
Distance
Separately adjusts the distance between each speaker and the listening position respectively.
66
Level
Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker.
66
Equalizer
Selects an equalizer type.
67
Test Tone
Turns the test tone generator on or off.
67
Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between audio and video output.
68
Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for the audio bit stream (Dolby Digital and DTS) signal playback.
68
Max Volume
Specify the maximum volume level that can be adjusted by VOLUME on the remote control.
68
Sound
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
68
CINEMA DSP 3D
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
69
DSP
Function
Program
Selects and adjusts a sound program and a decoder.
69
Input Rename
Changes the input source name.
71
Auto Power Down
Selects the amount of time after no operation is done that the unit enters standby.
71
Dimmer
Reduces the brightness of the front display.
71
Short Message
Turns the short messages displayed on the TV screen on or off.
71
Memory Guard
Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made to the settings of the “Setup” menu, YPAO, and SCENE.
72
TV Audio Input
Selects the input source that receives audio signals from a TV.
73
ARC
Turns the Audio Return Channel function (ARC) on or off.
73
Standby Sync
Selects the interlocked operation of the unit when the TV is turned off.
73
SCENE
Selects whether or not to interlock an external device connected to this unit when selecting the appropriate SCENE.
73
HDMI Control
HDMI
Language
Audio Output
Specifies where audio signal is output.
73
Standby Through
Specifies whether or not to transmit HDMI audio/video to the TV during standby mode.
74
Processing
Adjusts resolution and aspect ratio with conversion of video signal to HDMI.
74
Selects the language used for menus and messages output from the unit and displayed on the TV screen.
75
En
64
Configuring the speaker settings (Speaker)
Adjust parameters for speakers manually.
❏ Surround
Selects the size of the surround speakers and whether or not to use the speakers.
Settings
Large
Select this when large surround speakers are connected.
Small (Default)
Select this when small surround speakers are connected. The
subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce surround channel lowfrequency components.
None
Select this when no surround speakers are connected. The front
speakers will produce surround channel audio signals. When set to
“None,” the sound programs will change to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
❏ Surround Back
■ Configuration
Adjusts the output characteristics of the speakers based on manually set parameters.
Selects the size and number of the surround back speakers and whether or not to use
the speakers.
Settings
Large x1
Select this when one large surround back speaker is connected.
Large x2
Select this when two large surround back speakers are connected.
Small x1
Select this when one small surround back speakers is connected. The
subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce surround back channel lowfrequency components.
Small x2 (Default)
Select this when no surround back speakers are connected. The
subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce surround back channel lowfrequency components.
None
Select this when no surround back speakers are connected. The
surround speaker and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce
surround back channel.
• When specifying the speaker size, set the speaker size to “Large” for each speaker with a 16 cm or larger
woofer diameter, or to “Small” for a 16 cm or smaller woofer diameter.
❏ Front
Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front speakers.
Settings
Large
Select this when large front speakers are connected.
Small (Default)
Select this when small front speakers are connected. The subwoofer will
produce front channel low-frequency components.
• When “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” “Large” is automatically selected.
❏ Center
Selects the size of the center speaker and whether or not to use the speaker.
Settings
Large
Select this when a large center speaker is connected.
Small (Default)
Select this when a small center speaker is connected. The subwoofer
(or front speakers) will produce center channel low-frequency
components.
None
Select this when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will
produce center channel audio.
En
65
❏ Subwoofer
■ Distance
Set whether or not to use a subwoofer.
Separately adjusts the timing at which each speaker produce audio so that sounds from
the speaker reach the listening position at the same time.
Settings
Use (Default)
None
Select this when a subwoofer is connected to the unit. During playback,
the subwoofer will produce audio from the LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel and bass audio from other channels.
Select this when no subwoofer is connected to the unit. The front
speakers will produce bass frequency audio.
“Phase,” “Bass Cross Over” and “Extra Bass” can be set only when “Subwoofer” is set
to “Use.”
Submenu
Meter
Shows units of length in meters.
Feet
Shows units of length in feet.
• The default setting of units of length differs depending on your country or region.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Subwoofer
■ Phase
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft)
Settings
Normal (Default)
Does not change the subwoofer phase.
Reverse
Reverses the subwoofer phase.
*In 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Default setting
3.00 m (10.0 ft)
■ Level
• If the bass audio is lacking or unclear, the audio may be improved by changing the phase of the subwoofer.
Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Subwoofer
■ Bass Cross Over
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component output from speakers set to “Small.”
Audio with a frequency below that limit will be produced from the subwoofer or the front
speakers.
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (Default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default setting
0.0 dB
■ Extra Bass
Specifies a speaker to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Settings
Off (Default)
Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the front speakers or
the subwoofer produce the front channel low-frequency components.
On
The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the front channel lowfrequency components.
• When “Front” is set to “Small,” “Extra Bass” is automatically set to “Off.”
En
66
5 Use the cursor keys (
■ Equalizer
Selects an equalizer type.
“YPAO:Flat,” “YPAO:Front” and “YPAO:Natural” can be set after performing YPAO.
Settings
Through (Default)
Disables the equalizer.
Graphic EQ
Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust sound quality manually. For details,
refer to “Adjusting the graphic equalizer.”
YPAO:Flat
Sets uniform characteristics for each speaker.
YPAO:Front
Sets the characteristics of each speaker to match the front speakers.
YPAO:Natural
Adjusts all speaker sound to give natural acoustics.
/
) and select “EXIT,” and then press ENTER to finish
“Equalizer.”
■ Test Tone
Turns the test tone generator on or off. When this setting is set to “On,” the volume
balance settings for each speaker can be adjusted while listening to the output sound in
other speaker settings (such as “Level” or “Graphic EQ”).
Settings
Off (Default)
Does not generate test tones.
On
Generates test tones. While “On” is selected, test tones are produced
constantly.
■ Adjusting the graphic equalizer
1 Select “Graphic EQ” in “Equalizer,” and then press ENTER.
2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a speaker to adjust, and then press ENTER.
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a frequency you want to adjust.
Choices
63 Hz/160 Hz/400 Hz/1.0 kHz/2.5 kHz/6.3 kHz/16.0 kHz
4 Press the cursor keys (
/
) to adjust the volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default setting
0.0 dB
• Repeat steps 3-4 to adjust the tone to your liking.
• Press RETURN or the cursor keys (
/
) repeatedly to return to select a speaker to be adjusted
(step 2).
En
67
Configuring the settings of audio output signals
(Sound)
Configuring the settings of audio output signals.
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bit stream (Dolby Digital and
DTS) signal playback.
Settings
Maximum (Default)
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard
Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
(Minimum) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume or a quiet
environment, such as at night, for bit stream signals except for Dolby
TrueHD signals.
(Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD signals based on
input signal information.
■ Max Volume
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync function).
❏ Auto
When connected to a TV via HDMI, automatically adjusts audio output timing if the TV
supports an automatic lipsync function. If necessary, fine adjustment of the audio output
timing is possible. The difference between the result of auto delay and the fine
adjustments is displayed to the right of “Offset.”
Setting range
0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments)
Default setting
0 ms
❏ Manual
Manually adjusts the correction time.
Specifies the maximum volume level that is adjustable with VOLUME on the remote
control or VOLUME on the front panel.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default setting
+16.5 dB
■ Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
Off (Default)
The volume is set at the level when the receiver last entered standby
mode.
On
Makes the initial volume Mute or -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB
increments). (This setting is only available when setting a volume lower
than Max Volume.)
Setting range
0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments)
Default setting
0 ms
En
68
Setting sound program and decoder parameters (DSP)
Configuring the settings of sound programs and surround decoders.
4 Press the cursor keys to adjust the parameters, and then press ENTER.
5 If necessary, repeat step 3 to 4 to set other items.
6 Press SETUP to finish “Program.”
• For details on sound program, refer to “Enjoying the desired sound field effect” (p.36).
• Selectable items vary depending on the selected sound program or decoder.
❏ 2ch Stereo
Item
• Configurable items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
Direct
■ CINEMA DSP 3D
Turns CINEMA DSP 3D (p.39) on or off. When CINEMA DSP 3D is set to On, the
CINEMA DSP 3D mode automatically turns on in a sound program (except for 2ch
Stereo and 7ch Stereo).
Item
Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
On (Default)
Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Setting
Automatically bypasses the DSP
circuit and tone control circuit
depending on the condition of
tone control etc., when an analog
audio source is played back.
Auto (Default), Off
“Auto” outputs sound by bypassing
the DSP circuit and tone control
circuit in the following situations.
• Tone controls of “Bass” and
“Treble” are set to 0 dB (p.60).
• “Equalizer” is set to “Through”
(p.67).
• “Adaptive DRC” is set to “Off”
(p.60).
Description
Setting
❏ 7ch Stereo
Settings
Off
Description
Center Level
Adjusts the center channel
volume.
Surround L Level
Adjusts the volume of the
surround L channel.
• This setting can be set when the selected sound program supports CINEMA DSP.
Surround R Level
Adjusts the volume of the
surround R channel.
■ Program
Surround Back Level
Adjusts the volume of the
surround back channel.
Select and adjust a sound program and decoder. Select a sound program of which you
want to change the settings, and then set the parameters for each item. The sound
program is switched at this time.
Surround Back L
Level
Adjusts the volume of the
surround back L channel.
Surround Back R
Level
Adjusts the volume of the
surround back R channel.
Reset
Initializes the level of each
speaker.
0% to 100% (Default: 50%)
0% to 100% (Default: 30%)
■ Procedure
1 Press the cursor keys to select “Program” and then press ENTER.
2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a sound program of which you want change
0% to 100% (Default: 100%)
OK, CANCEL
Press the cursor keys ( / ) to
select “OK,” and then press ENTER
to initialize all level settings.
the settings, and then press ENTER.
3 Press the cursor keys (
/ ) to select an item of which you want to change the
items, and then press ENTER.
• Selectable items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on types of speakers connected to the unit.
En
69
❏ Category: MUSIC (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo)
■ When “
Sound programs
Hall in Munich, Hall in Vienna, Chamber, Cellar Club, The Roxy Theatre, The Bottom Line
Item
DSP Level
Description
Changes the effect level (level of
the sound field effect to be
added).
Item
Decode Type
DSP Level
Description
Setting
Select a decoder to play back
sources combined with a sound
program.
PLIIx Movie (
Neo:6 Cinema
Changes the effect level (level of
the sound field effect to be
added).
-6 dB to +3 dB (Default: 0 dB)
The higher the value is, the stronger
the effect level is output. The lower
the value is, the smaller the effect
level is output.
Setting
Panorama
Adjusts the soundscape of the
front sound field.
Off (Default), On
When set to “On,” front left/right
channels sounds are sent to the
surround speakers as well as the
front speakers for a wraparound
effect.
Center Width
Spreads the center channel sound
to the front left and right speakers
to suit your needs or preferences.
0 to 7 (Default: 3)
The higher the value is, the broader
the center channel is output. The
lower the value is, the narrower the
center channel is output.
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in level
between the front sound field and
the surround sound field.
-3 to +3 (Default: 0)
The higher the value is, the stronger
the front sound field is. The lower
the value is, the stronger the
surround sound field is.
Sound programs
Sports, Action Game, Roleplaying Game, Music Video, Standard, Spectacle, Sci-Fi, Adventure,
Drama, Mono Movie
Description
PLII Music)” is selected:
Setting
-6 dB to +3 dB (Default: 0 dB)
The higher the value is, the stronger
the effect level is output. The lower
the value is, the smaller the effect
level is output.
❏ Category: MOVIE
item
PLIIx Music (
PLII Movie),
■ When “Neo:6 Music” is selected:
Item
Center Image
• “Decode Type” is only available when selecting “Standard,” “Spectacle,” “Sci-Fi,” “Adventure” and “Drama.”
Description
Setting
Adjusts the front left and right
channel output relative to the
center channel to make the center
channel more or less dominant as
necessary.
0.0 to 1.0 (Default: 0.3)
The higher the value is, the stronger
the center channel is and the
narrower the center width is. The
lower the value is, the weaker the
center channel is and the broader
the center width is.
❏ SUR. DECODE
item
Description
Setting
Decode Type
Select a decoder to play back
sources
Pro Logic,
PLIIx Movie
(
PLII Movie),
PLIIx Music
(
PLII Music),
PLIIx Game
(
PLII Game), Neo:6 Cinema,
Neo:6 Music
Reset
Initializes the settings of
“SUR.DECODE.”
OK, CANCEL
Press the cursor keys ( / ) to
select “OK,” and then press ENTER
to initialize the settings.
When selecting “ PLIIx Music (
the following settings can be set.
PLII Music)” or “Neo:6 Music” in the “Decode Type,”
En
70
Configuring the various settings (Function)
Set the various features that have handy functions.
5 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “OK,” and then press ENTER.
6 To change other input names, repeat step 2 to 5.
7 Press SETUP to close “Input Rename.”
• Select “CANCEL” in step 5 to return to the previous screen without confirming the name changed.
■ Auto Power Down
If you do not operate the unit or use the remote control for an extended period of time, it
will automatically go into standby mode (Auto Power Down function).
Settings
■ Input Rename
Changes the input name displayed on the front display and TV screen.
Input
All inputs except for TUNER
Off
Auto Power Down function is disabled.
4Hours, 8Hours,
12Hours
Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated the unit for the
selected amount time. A countdown of 30 seconds is displayed on the
front display before entering the standby mode.
Default setting
8Hours (U.K. and Europe models)
Off (Other models)
■ Procedure
1 Select “Input Rename,” and press ENTER.
2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a name which you want to rename, and then
■ Dimmer
Sets the brightness of the front display.
press ENTER.
3 Press the cursor keys (
/
) to select a preset name to your liking, and then press
ENTER.
Input currently edited
Setting range
-4 to 0 (The higher the value the brighter the display.)
Default setting
0
■ Short Message
Turns the short message displayed on the TV screen on or off. For example, this
settings is set to “Off” to prevent that the subscription of video images is got behind the
short message.
Settings
Off
Does not display the short message on the TV screen.
On (Default)
Displays the short message on the TV screen. When the output video
signals are being upscalled, the short message may not be displayed.
Input name currently renamed
4 (To confirm the selected name) Press ENTER.
(To rename the selected name) Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a character
that you want to change, and then press the cursor keys ( / ) to change the
character.
En
71
■ Memory Guard
Setting HDMI functions (HDMI)
Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made to the settings of the
“Setup” menu, YPAO, and SCENE.
Set the settings on HDMI functions.
Settings
Off (Default)
Settings are not protected.
On
Prohibits changes to the settings in the “Setup” menu until it is returned
to “Off.” During memory guard, the protection icon ( ) is displayed at
upper right on the TV monitor.
• If you try to set the protected items, “Memory Guard! (Memory Guard!)” is displayed on the front display and
TV monitor.
■ HDMI Control
Enable or disable the HDMI control (p.92).
Settings
Off (Default)
Disables the HDMI control function.
On
Enables the HDMI control function.
When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” “TV Audio Input,” “ARC,” “Standby Sync” and
“SCENE” can be set.
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” “Audio Output” (p.73) or “Standby Through” (p.74) is automatically fixed
to “Control Sync” and cannot be set manually.
En
72
❏ TV Audio Input
❏ SCENE
Select the input source that receives audio signals from TV while the HDMI Control
function is on. When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and
the function is enabled, the audio input for the TV is assigned to the input source
selected here.
Specify whether or not a TV or external device (such as a BD/DVD player) connected to
the unit is operated by interlocking by pressing SCENE.
Choices
BD/DVD, TV, CD, RADIO
Settings
Settings
AV1-6
The selected input source between AV1 to 6 receives audio signals
from TV.
AUDIO
AUDIO receives audio signals from TV.
Off
Does not synchronize the external device with SCENE.
On
Synchronizes the external device when pressing the appropriate
SCENE.
Default setting
On (BD/DVD, TV)
Off (CD, RADIO)
Default setting
AV4
• While “ARC” is set to “On,” the input source selected here is used for TV audio input. Therefore, the jack
selected for the input source on the rear of the unit cannot be used.
• When this item is set to “On” and the external devices that are compatible with the HDMI control function
(with some exceptions) are connected to the unit, the SCENE synchronization is activated (p.35).
❏ ARC
Enable or disable ARC (Audio Return Channel) (p.18).
Settings
■ Audio Output
Choose whether audio is played back through the unit or through a TV.
Off
Disables ARC (Audio Return Channel function).
On (Default)
Enables ARC (Audio Return Channel function).
❏ Standby Sync
❏ Amp
Specify whether or not audio signals are output through the unit.
Settings
Specify whether or not to turn off the unit automatically when the TV connected to the
unit with HDMI cable turns off.
Off
Audio is not output from speakers.
On (Default)
Audio is output from speakers.
Settings
Off
Does not turn off the unit when the TV is turned off.
On
Always turns off the unit when the TV is turned off.
Auto (Default)
In a case of the followings, the unit turns off by interlocking power-off of
the TV:
• Watching the TV (input source is set to AV4.)
• Using HDMI devices (input source is set to HDMI, and the device
connected to HDMI jack is being played.)
• “Standby Sync” is available only if your TV is compatible with the HDMI control function.
❏ HDMI OUT (TV)
Specify whether or not audio signals are output through a TV connected via the HDMI
OUT jack.
Settings
Off (Default)
Audio is not output from the TV.
On
Audio is output from the TV.
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” “Audio Output” is automatically fixed to “Control Sync” and cannot be
set manually.
En
73
■ Standby Through
❏ Resolution
Specify whether or not audio/video signals from HDMI inputs are to continue to be
transmitted to a TV when the unit is in standby mode.
Select the resolution of HDMI output video signals. For details on conversion of video
resolution, refer to “Video conversion table” (p.91).
Settings
Settings
Off (Default)
Does not output HDMI signals to a TV.
Through
No upscaling.
On
Outputs HDMI signals to a TV (1 to 3 W power consumption)
Auto (Default)
Automatic upscaling in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p
Upscaling to the selected resolution. (Only resolutions that the TV
supports can be selected.)
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” “Standby Through” is automatically fixed to “Control Sync” and cannot
be set manually.
• While “Standby Through” is activated, the standby indictor on the front panel lights up.
• While “Standby Through” is activated, the input source can be switched between HDMI1-5 and V-AUX
■ Procedure
1 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a setting.
2 Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
(HDMI) with the remote control. The standby indicator on the front panel flashes twice in response.
■ Processing
• Only 480i/576i and 480p/576p-resolution video signals can be upscalled (p.91).
Specifies whether or not to adjust resolution and aspect ratio with the conversion of
video input to HDMI video (upscaling).
Settings
Off (Default)
Does not adjust resolution and aspect ratio of video signals.
On
Adjusts resolution and aspect ratio of video signals. The each
parameter can be set in the following “Resolution” and “Aspect.”
• Analog video signals can be converted and output to HDMI video despite the setting in this item.
• When a resolution that is not supported by the TV needs to be selected, set “MON.CHK” in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” to select the all resolutions (p.77). Please note that selecting the
resolution that the TV does not support may cause a black screen on the TV monitor.
❏ Aspect
Select the aspect ratio of HDMI output video signals.
Settings
Through (Default)
Does not adjust the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Converts 4:3 aspect ratio video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on
either side of the screen.
En
74
Setting the language displayed on the TV screen
(Language)
Selecting the language displayed on the TV screen.
Settings
English (Default)
English
Japanese
Français
French
Deutsch
German
Español
Spanish
Russian
• Only English is displayed on the front display.
• Even if selecting a language in this item, the characters contained in the name of file, folder and song
cannot be displayed in the selected language.
En
75
Configuring the system settings of the unit (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Operating the ADVANCED SETUP menu
Looking at the front display to configure the system settings of the unit.
1 Switch the unit to the standby mode if the unit is turned on.
2 Press while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel.
Changing the speaker impedance
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
SP IMP. -8 MIN
Changes the unit settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected.
Settings
key
6ΩMIN
Select the impedance when 6Ω speakers are connected.
8ΩMIN (Default)
Select the impedance when speakers above 8Ω are connected.
Changing the remote control ID
PROGRAM key
STRAIGHT key
3 Press PROGRAM to select the item.
4 Press STRAIGHT to select the value.
5 Press to switch the unit to the standby mode, and then switch it on
again.
The settings become effective and the unit is turned on.
Features of the ADVANCED SETUP menu
Items
Descriptions
SP IMP.
(U.S.A. and Canada models only) Sets the impedance of speakers.
REMOTE ID
Changes the remote control ID of a receiver.
BI-AMP
Switches the bi-amp connections on or off.
TV FORMAT
Specifies the TV’s color encoding format.
MON.CHK
Removes the up-scaling limitation on HDMI video output.
TU
(Asia and General models only) Selects one of the following FM/AM
frequency steps.
INIT
Initializes various settings for the unit.
REMOTEID-ID1
The remote control of the unit can only receive signals from a receiver which has an
identical ID (remote control ID). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set
each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1 (Default), ID2
■ To change the remote control ID of the remote control
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically
stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation.
1 Press CODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
2 Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.
3 Enter “5019” (to switch to ID1) or “5020” (to switch to ID2) with the numeric keys.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully the remote control will blink twice.
If SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks 6 times, the registration failed. Repeat from step1.
• If the remote control ID is changed, the registered settings of the remote control code (p.79) are kept.
En
76
Setting the bi-amp connections
BI-AMP-OFF
Settings
YES (Default)
Enables the monitor check function. (Video output signals of a resolution
not supported by the TV will not be transmitted.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Video output signals of any
resolution will be transmitted.)
Switch the bi-amp connections of the front speakers on or off. Refer to “Connecting front
speakers compatible with bi-amp connection” (p.16) for details.
Settings
• If no picture is output from the TV and this unit goes out of control after “MON.CHK” is set to “SKIP,” set this
ON
Turns bi-amp connections on.
OFF (Default)
Turns bi-amp connections off.
Changing TV format
item back to “YES.”
Changing FM/AM frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
TU - AM9/FM50
TVFORMAT-NTSC
Change the color encoding format of TV monitor to PAL or NTSC, to match the format
used by the TV connected to the unit.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
You can select one of the following FM/AM frequency steps:
Settings
AM10/FM100
You can adjust the AM frequency by steps of 10kHz and FM by steps of
100kHz.
AM9/FM50
You can adjust the AM frequency by steps of 9kHz and FM by steps of
50kHz.
• The default setting differs depending on your country or region.
Removing HDMI video output upscaling limits
MON.CHK-YES
This unit automatically detects the resolutions supported by the TV connected to this
unit with an HDMI cable, and restricts the resolution selected in the “Resolution” (p.74)
of the “Setup” menu (monitor check function). When a resolution that the TV does not
support needs to be selected, this menu will remove the limitation from the settings
selected in “Resolution.”
• The default setting differs depending on your country or region.
• For details on setting FM/AM frequency steps, refer to “Changing FM/AM tuner frequency steps (Asia and
General models only)” (p.41).
Initializing various settings for the unit
INIT-CANCEL
Initialize various settings stored in the unit depending on the selected item from the
following.
Settings
DSP PARAM
Initializes all parameters for the sound programs.
ALL
Resets the unit to default factory settings.
CANCEL (Default)
Does not initialize.
En
77
CODE SET
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
SOURCE/
RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
V
VAUX
5
A
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
Controlling other devices with the remote control
You can operate an external device such as a TV or BD/DVD player
with the remote control of the unit by setting the remote control code
for the external device (remote control code).
Registering remote control codes for TV
operations
Register a TV remote control code to control the TV with the remote
control.
USB
• External devices that do not support infrared remote control cannot be used.
FM
AM
PRESET
INFO
TUNING
• Confirm that the remote control ID is set to “ID1” on the external device. If another
MEMORY
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENHANCER
SLEEP
remote control ID is set on the external device, the remote control does not work
• When the audio output jack on the TV is connected to the input jack on the unit,
correctly even if the remote control codes for the external device are registered on
follow the procedure in “Registering remote control codes for external device
the remote control.
operations” (p.79) to register a TV remote control code.
DIRECT
SCENE
CD
• Leaving exhausted batteries in the remote control for more than 2 minutes, may
RADIO
OPTION
clear the registered remote control codes. If this should occur, replace the
batteries with new ones, and set the remote control codes.
VOLUME
• When the external device cannot be operated with the remote control even if all
DISPLAY
A
corresponding remote control codes are set to the remote control, the external
POP-UP
MENU
device is not supported.
MUTE
MODE
• The manufacturers and external devices that do not exit in “Remote Control Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Numeric keys
10
MUTE
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings
will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes
after the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 2.
number of a unit.
TV
TV VOL
2 Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
remote control.
• Remote control code of an external device cannot be set from the name or model
ENT
to search the available remote control codes from
the category or manufacturer of the TV.
Search” contained in the CD-ROM are not available for operations of the unit’s
TV
INPUT
1 Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
TV CH
When the HDMI control functions of both unit and the playback
device are enabled, the devices may be controlled using the
remote control even if not registering the remote control code.
3 Press TV .
4 Enter a remote control code (4-digit) using the
numeric keys.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully
SOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice.
If the registration fails, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks six times.
En
78
■ Operating the TV with the remote control
CODE SET
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
5
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
MOVIE
MUSIC
PRESET
TUNING
SOURCE/
RECEIVER
Input selection keys
HDMI 1-5
V-AUX
AV 1-6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
When the remote control codes for the TV are registered, the TV can
be operated at any time using the TV control keys, regardless of the
selected input source.
TV operation
keys
3 Press an input selection key.
(Example) When the remote control codes for the BD/DVD
player connected to HDMI1 jack are assigned, press HDMI1.
4 Enter a remote control code (4-digit) using the
INPUT
Switches video inputs to the TV.
numeric keys.
MUTE
Mutes TV volume temporarily.
TV VOL
Controls the volume of the TV.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully
SOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice.
TV CH
Switches TV channels.
TV
Turns the TV on and off.
If the registration fails, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks six times. If
the registration fails, repeat from step 2.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP
DIRECT
• For details on how to register the input selection key applied the remote
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
SCENE
• When a TV remote control code is registered to an input selection key, the TV can
OPTION
be operated using the TV operation keys only when the input source with the TV
control code on a corresponding SCENE key, refer to “Changing the settings
for the SCENE function” (p.35).
code registered is selected.
VOLUME
DISPLAY
A
POP-UP
MENU
Registering remote control codes for
external device operations
MUTE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
Numeric keys
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
TV operation keys
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
TV
Register remote control codes for external devices (such as a BD/
DVD player) to control them with the unit’s remote control. Because
the remote control codes are registered to each input selection key,
when you select an input source the remote control instantly
switches to control that input source.
• The CD player (Yamaha: 5095) to AV3 as factory default settings. No remote
control keys are assigned to other input selection keys.
1 Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to search the available remote control codes for the
category, manufacturer, or external device.
2 Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings
will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes
after the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 2.
En
79
SOURCE
CODE SET
CODE SET
SOURCE RECEIVER
HDMI
1
2
3
4
V-AUX
5
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
FM
AM
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNING
SOURCE/
RECEIVER
Input selection keys
HDMI 1-5
V-AUX
AV 1-6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
ENHANCER
operation keys and numeric keys between the unit and external devices. The unit
can be controlled when SOURCE/RECEIVER glows orange. External devices can
DIRECT
CD
RADIO
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
VOLUME
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Menu operation
keys
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
Turns on and off external
devices.
SOURCE
SCENE
TV
MUTE
MODE
External device
operation keys
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Initializing all remote control codes
Initializing all remote control codes to the initial factory settings.
1 Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
• Use SOURCE/RECEIVER to switch the device to be controlled with menu
MUSIC
SLEEP
BD
DVD
When the remote control codes for external devices are assigned to
an input selection key, the external device can be controlled with
the following keys after selecting the appropriate input source or
SCENE.
be controlled when the key glows green.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
■ Operating external devices
Cursor
Selects an item.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
DISPLAY
Switch the content of display.
TOP MENU
Displays the top menu.
POP-UP MENU
Displays a pop-up menu.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings
will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes
after the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 1.
2 Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.
3 Enter “9981” using the numeric keys.
Once the remote control code is reset successfully SOURCE/
RECEIVER will blink twice. If the reset fails, SOURCE/
RECEIVER blinks six times. If setup fails, repeat from step 1.
Stops playback.
Numeric keys
Stops playback temporarily.
10
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
TV operation keys
External device
operation keys
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL
TV CH
TV
Starts playback of the currently
selected song (or video).
Searches backwards/forwards
while pressing them.
Skips to the beginning of the
currently playing song (or
video)/the next song (or video).
Numeric keys
Enter numbers.
TV operation keys
Operate a TV.
• The keys above are only available when there are the corresponding keys on the
remote control of external devices.
En
80
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance...
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
If you have changed speakers or speaker system, perform YPAO to optimize the
speaker settings again (p.29). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use
“Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.65).
You can protect the settings configured on this unit (speaker settings, etc.) by utilizing
“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.72).
The supplied remote control concurrently controls this unit and another Yamaha
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control...
product that is not intended...
If a small child, etc. accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote
control, the volume may suddenly increase. And this may cause injury or damage this
unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
maximum volume level for this unit in advance (p.68).
When using multiple Yamaha products, the supplied remote control may work on
another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on this unit. In this case,
set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver
(p.76).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden large sound when turning on this unit...
By default, the volume level when this unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” to set the volume to be
applied when this receiver is turned on (p.68).
En
81
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below if the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
Confirm the following points first.
a The power plugs of the unit, TV and external devices (such as a BD/DVD player) are plugged into the electric outlet securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and external devices (such as a BD/DVD player) are turned on.
c The cables between devices are connected securely.
Power/system
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The power will not turn on.
The internal circuits of the unit have a problem.
The capability to turn on the power is disabled as a safety precaution. Contact
your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repairs.
The unit cannot be turned off.
The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in
the power supply voltage.
Press and hold
rebooted.
The unit enters standby mode soon after
The unit was turned on while a speaker cable is shorted.
the power is turned on.
The unit enters standby mode.
The unit does not work properly.
(power) for over 10 seconds. The unit will be initialized and
Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are
connected properly.
The sleep timer has turned the unit off.
Turn on the unit, and play the source again.
The auto power down function is activated because of no operations
with the remote control or the unit itself for a while.
Set “Auto Power Down” to “Off” to disable the auto power down function
(p.71).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit,
etc.
Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are
connected properly.
The heat protection has been activated because sound was continually
output at high volumes.
Wait until the unit cools to normal temperature, turn on the unit again and turn
down the volume level and play the source again (p.34).
The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in
the power supply voltage.
Press and hold
rebooted.
(power) for over 10 seconds. The unit will be initialized and
En
82
Audio
Problem
No sound.
The volume cannot be increased.
No sound is output from one speaker.
No sound is heard from the surround
back speakers.
No sound is heard from the subwoofer.
No sound from a device connected
using an HDMI cable.
Cause
Remedy
No appropriate input source has been selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection key.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source
device, such as a CD-ROM.
Use an input source that has signals that can be reproduced on the unit.
The mute function is activated.
Press MUTE to unmute.
The cable between the unit and the external device may be
malfunctioning.
Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are
connected properly. If after checking you can find no problems, replace the
cables.
The max volume of the unit is restricted by “Max Volume” function.
Adjust the max volume of the unit in “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu.
The device connected to the output jack of the unit is not turned on.
(This may occur because of the character of AV receiver.)
Turn on all devices connected to the unit.
Sound may not be output from certain channels, depending on the
input source.
You can confirm the number of source channels in the input signal with
“Channel (Chan)” of “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.61).
Sound may not be output from certain channels, depending on the
sound program or decoder.
You can confirm the number of output channels with the speaker indicators on
the front display (p.8).
Output from the affected speaker is disabled.
Perform YPAO (p.29), or set the size or enable the affected speaker in
“Configuration” (p.65) on the “Setup” menu.
The volume of the affected speaker is set excessively low.
Perform YPAO (p.29), or adjust the volume level of the affected speaker in
“Level” (p.66) on the “Setup” menu.
The cable between the unit and the external device may be
malfunctioning.
Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are
connected properly. If no problem, replace the cables.
The affected speaker may be malfunctioning.
Replace the affected speaker with another speaker that is operating correctly
to confirm whether the speaker is malfunctioning. If no sound comes from the
replacement speaker, the unit may be malfunctioning.
“Max Volume” is set to a low value.
Set it to a higher value.
The speakers that have a problem cannot be confirmed.
Use “Test Tone” to confirm the speakers that do not output sounds (p.67).
“Extended Surround” is set to “Off.”
Set “Extended Surround” to a decoder or “Auto” (p.61).
The source does not contain LFE or low frequency signals.
To confirm, set “Extra Bass” to “On” to output the low frequency sound of the
front channel from the subwoofer (p.66).
The subwoofer is inactive.
Perform YPAO (p.29), or set “Subwoofer” to “Use” in the “Setup” menu (p.66).
The subwoofer is tuned off.
Turn on the subwoofer.
The volume of the subwoofer is set to a low value.
Set it to a higher value.
The connected HDMI device does not support high-bandwidth digital
copyright protection (HDCP).
You can confirm if message concerning HDMI error is displayed in “Signal
Info” in the “Option” menu (p.61).
HDMI input audio is set to not output from the speakers.
Set “Amp” to “On” in “Audio Output” of the “Setup” menu (p.73).
The number of devices is over the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
En
83
Problem
Cause
Remedy
(When using HDMI Control function) The setting of “TV Audio Input” to
match operations carried out on TV is not set.
Select the appropriate audio input jack in “TV Audio Input” on the “Setup”
menu.
(When using the Audio Return Channel function) The Audio Return
Channel function is not working.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.73). Or, the Audio Return Channel
function is activated on the TV.
The TV is not ARC-compatible and connected to the unit only with an
HDMI cable.
Connect an optical cable to AV4 (p.20, 21), or other cables and set the
appropriate input source with “TV Audio Input” (p.73).
Sound is output from the TV.
Set “HDMI Control” (p.72) or “Audio Output” (p.73) correctly to output sound
from the unit.
The playback device is set to output only 2 channel sound (such as
PCM).
Set the audio output settings on the playback device.
The unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency equipment
(including iPhone).
Move the unit further away from such equipment.
The cable between the unit and the external device may be
malfunctioning.
Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are
connected properly. If no problem, replace the cables.
Noise is heard when a DTS-CD is being
played back.
(When only noise is output) The playback device is connected by
analog connection.
Connect the playback device to the unit by a digital connection (optical or
coaxial connection). If you still have a problem, the playback device may have
a problem.
The sound is distorted.
The devices connected to the output jacks of the unit are not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit.
The songs from the USB storage device
are played back intermittently.
The transfer rate of the USB storage device is too slow.
TV sound is not output from the unit.
Only the front speakers output sound
during multi-channel playback.
Noise/hum noise is heard.
Try another USB storage device.
Video
Problem
No picture.
No picture from the video device
connected with an HDMI cable.
Cause
Remedy
An appropriate input source is not selected on the unit.
Select an appropriate input source (video device) using the input selection
keys.
An appropriate video input is not selected on the TV.
Select an appropriate input on the TV.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by a monitor
connected to the unit.
Set “MON.CHK” to “YES” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.77).
The cable between the unit, the TV and the video devices may be
malfunctioning.
Make sure that all cables are connected properly. If no problem, replace the
cables.
You can confirm the video signal (resolution) currently being input in “Signal
A video signal (resolution) that the unit does not support is being input. Info” in the “Option” menu (p.61). For detail on video signals which the unit
supports, refer to “Information on HDMI” (p.92).
The connected HDMI device does not support high-bandwidth digital
copyright protection (HDCP).
Display “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu to confirm the video signal
(resolution) currently input (p.61).
The number of devices is over the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
En
84
Problem
The menu of the unit is not displayed.
Cause
Remedy
The TV is connected to the unit with a cable except for HDMI cable.
Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to the unit.
An appropriate video input is not selected on the TV.
Select the input source of the TV to the video input from the HDMI OUT of the
unit.
Tuner (FM/AM)
Problem
FM stereo radio reception is noisy.
Cause
Remedy
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
You are too far from the station transmitter, or the input from the antenna
is weak.
Switch the receiving mode to monaural using MODE (p.42).
The noises may be caused by lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise, but it can be reduced by installing
an outdoor AM antenna.
AM radio reception is noisy.
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
The signal is weak, or the antenna connections are loose.
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna.
Select the station manually (p.41).
Radio stations cannot be selected
automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
AM radio stations cannot be preset.
Automatic station preset is used to preset AM stations.
Use an outdoor antenna commercially available. We recommend using a
sensitive multi-element antenna.
Automatic station preset is not available for AM stations. Use manual station
preset.
Remote control
Problem
The remote control does not work or
function properly.
External devices cannot be controlled
using the remote control.
Cause
Remedy
Wrong distance.
Operate the remote control within its operating range (p.4).
The batteries are weak.
Replace the batteries (p.4).
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp,
strobe light, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of the unit.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The operation device is set to an external device.
Switch the operation device to the unit using RECEIVER/SOURCE (it should
glow orange) and operate the unit (p.10).
The remote control ID of the remote control and the unit do not match.
Match the remote control ID of the unit and the remote control (p.76).
The operation device is set to the unit.
Switch the operation device to the external device using RECEIVER/SOURCE
(it should glow green) and operate the external device (p.10).
The remote control code is not correctly set.
Set the remote control code correctly (p.78, 79). Even if the remote control
code is correctly set, there are some devices that do not respond to the
remote control.
En
85
Message list
Message (alphabetical order)
Cause
The unit cannot access your USB storage device or iPod.
Access error
There is a problem with the signal path from your USB storage device
to the unit.
Remedy
Try another USB device or iPod.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB storage device to the USB port of the
unit.
When an iPod is connected to the USB port, turn the iPod off and on.
CHECK SP WIRES!
The protection circuitry has been activated because this unit was
turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit and speakers are
connected properly.
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to the unit.
Loading...
The data of the USB storage devices and iPod are being loaded.
It takes a long while to load the data when connecting a device that has a
large amount of data.
No content
There is no playable data on the USB storage devices or iPod.
Connect the USB storage device or iPod in which the playable data are
stored.
No device
There is a problem with the signal path from your USB storage device
to the unit.
Turn off the unit and reconnect the iPod dock (p.47).
Reconnect the iPod to the iPod dock (p.47).
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB storage device to the USB port of the
unit.
When iPod is connected to the USB port, turn the iPod off and on.
USB storage device is not connected to the USB port.
Connect the USB storage device to the USB port on the front panel of the unit.
During pairing:
- Pairing must be performed on the Bluetooth device and the unit
simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth device is in pairing mode.
Not found
The Bluetooth device is not found.
While connected:
- Check if the Bluetooth device is turned on.
- Check if the Bluetooth device is within 10 m (32 ft.) of the Yamaha Bluetooth
Wireless Audio Receiver.
- Do pairing again.
Unknown iPod
The iPod being used is not supported by the unit.
Connect an iPod that is supported by the unit (p.46).
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on your iPod.
Check the songs stored on your iPod.
Unable to play
The song that the unit cannot play back is selected, or the selected
song data is damaged.
Select and play another song.
Confirm the display on the TV connected with an HDMI cable.
View ON SCREEN
The selected item cannot be displayed on the front display.
When “SETUP” is displayed at the upper left on the front display, press SETUP
on the remote control to return to normal display on the front display.
When “USB” or “DOCK” at the upper left on the front display, press the cursor
key ( ) to return to the display of menu list or playing song.
En
86
Ideal speaker layout
The following illustration indicates the ideal speaker layout. We recommend using the following layout as a guide when placing the speakers.
However, by using YPAO, you can automatically optimize the speaker settings to suit your speaker layout.
Turn it slightly inward to
reduce wall reflections.
30 cm (1 ft.) or more
En
87
Glossary
Audio information
Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem,
and the capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and
transmission.
Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustment, HDMI version 1.3
incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this
synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction.
Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the
woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter
section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This
restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to
influence the sound in some way.
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their
effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home
conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is
inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard. Based on a wealth of actually
measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby
Pro Logic, Dolby Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images.
CINEMA DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so
that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by
regenerating the missing harmonics in compression artifacts. As a result, it compensates for
flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss
of lowfrequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound system.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multichannel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby
Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects,
referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as
0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound
effects and surround sound environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic
range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5 full-range channels, and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provides listeners with
unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a
5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby
Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and
right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround
channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for
music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or
multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie
mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic
sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a
surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound
within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser
discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel
to enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based
media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8
discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible
with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital,
allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and
is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared
to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality
transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion
video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the
world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and
natural spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround
channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels).
DTS Express
This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray discs. It uses optimized low
bit rate signals for network streaming. In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with
secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while
playing the main program.
En
88
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition
disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,
this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a highdefinition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio
systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is
called the sampling frequency, while the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is
determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling
frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition discbased media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master
Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by
HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,
DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters
for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the
sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super
Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of
2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common
occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio
quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The
frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can transmit
or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack.
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to
120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared
to the full-range reproduced by the other 5-channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems.
Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback by the specific decoder.
It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal
playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for
movie sources.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and
transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD
audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small
unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then
modulated for recording.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround
effects even without any surround speakers, by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible
to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
Video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for
luminance and the PB and PR signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with
this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the
“color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor
with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the three basic elements of a
video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video
component transmits these three elements combined.
Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in
previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays
increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth
tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent
many times more shades of gray between black and white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the
number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry supported, uncompressed, all-digital
audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV
receivers) and audio/video monitors (such as digital televisions), HDMI supports standard,
enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI
transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a
secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system
operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/.”
En
89
S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated
and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the
S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows
recording and playback of even more beautiful images.
“x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining
compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can
thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer
graphics.
En
90
Video signal flow
■ Video conversion table
The video signals input from video devices to the unit are
output to a TV.
• Use “Processing” in the “Setup” menu to change the resolution and aspect ratio of video signals and output from the HDMI OUT jack.
• The unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals interchangeably.
: video signal flow
HDMI output
Video device
The unit
COMPONENT VIDEO output
VIDEO
output
TV
Resolution
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p
1080i
1080p
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p
1080i
480i/
576i
480i/576i
Input
Output
HDMI1-5
HDMI OUT
480p/576p
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI input
720p
1080i
1080p
COMPONENT
VIDEO
(AV1-2)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
(MONITOR
OUT)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
480i/576i
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PR
PR
PR
PB
PB
PB
PB
Y
Y
Y
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO input
480p/576p
720p
1080i
S VIDEO
(AV5)
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
(AV3-6)
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
(MONITOR
OUT)
VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO input
(U.K. and
Europe
models only)
480i/576i
VIDEO input
480i/576i
* S VIDEO is only available for U.K. and Europe models
En
91
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Connecting the unit and TV with an HDMI cable links the TV’s remote control to the unit
so you can use it to turn on the power and adjust the volume of the unit (HDMI Control).
Playback devices connected to the unit with an HDMI cable (such as a BD/DVD player
compatible with HDMI control) can also be operated with the remote control. For details
on operations between the TV and the playback devices using the HDMI control
function, refer to the manual for each device.
For details on connections of HDMI cables, refer to “Connecting a TV” (p.18) and
“Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.23).
HDMI
Control
Playback device
(such as a BD/DVD player)
compatible with HDMI Control (such as a BD/DVD player) to “On.”
Set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” to enable the HDMI Control
function of the unit.
3 Turn the TV off.
Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the TV. If they are not
synchronized, unplug the power cable of the TV.
4 Turn the TV on.
HDMI
Control
The unit
1 Turn on the unit, the TV and external devices.
2 Set the HDMI Control function of the unit, the TV and external devices
Confirm that the unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If it is still off, turn it
on manually.
TV
TV’s remote control
5 Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that is connected to
the unit.
6 Turn the playback devices on, and confirm the following points.
- Turning the power on and off
The unit: Confirm that the input source for HDMI input (one of HDMI1-5) has been
selected. If a different input source has been selected, change it
manually.
- Volume control, including mute
TV:
Operating the unit using the HDMI control function
- Changing the input to video/audio from the operated external device
Confirm that the video signal from the player is being properly received
by the TV.
7 Confirm that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
on/off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• The following operations of the unit are interlocked with the TV/playback devices by HDMI control.
- Switching a SCENE (p.35)
- Displaying the “Setup” menu (p.63)
- Operating external device with the unit’s remote control (p.79)
• If the HDMI Control function does not work properly, unplugging and re-plugging the power cable of the unit
and the TV may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of video output settings on the
The following settings are required after connecting the TV and playback devices to the
unit to use the HDMI Control function.
TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices made by the same manufacturer so that the HDMI Control
function works more effectively.
• The following settings are required whenever a new HDMI compatible device is added.
En
92
HDMI signal compatibility
Trademarks
Audio signals
Audio signal types
Audio signal formats
Compatible media
2ch Linear PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch Linear PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD
DVD, etc.
DSD
2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
SACD, etc.
Bitstream
Dolby Digital, DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
Bitstream (High definition
audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output,
depending on the type of the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the device). Refer to
the supplied instruction manuals for details.
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents
downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio commentaries of
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide
patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD
Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. ©DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
iPod™/iPhone™
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to
connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory
standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless
performance.
iPhone and iPod are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with
a license agreement.
the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content.
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
En
93
Specifications
Input Jacks
HDMI
Tuner
• Analog Audio...................... 4 (AV5, AV6, AUDIO, VIDEO AUX)
• Input
Front.................................................................. 1 (VIDEO AUX)
Rear .......................................................................5 (HDMI1-5)
• Analog Tuner
FM/AM ..................................................................... 1 (TUNER)
• Digital Audio
Optical...................................................................2 (AV1, AV4)
Coaxial ..................................................................2 (AV2, AV3)
• Video
Composite ............................................. 5 (AV3-6, VIDEO AUX)
S-Video [U.K. and Europe models] ............................... 1 (AV5)
Component............................................................2 (AV1, AV2)
• Other
DOCK ........................................... 1 (Audio, Composite Video)
USB .........................................................................................1
Device Type................................... USB Mass Storage Class
Audio Format ............MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM), MPEG-4 AAC
Max Audio Support fs........................................48 kHz/24 bit
Cover Art Format ................................................. PNG, JPEG
Output Jacks
• Analog Audio
Speaker Out ........................................................................7ch
Front L/R (FRONT L/R)
Center (CENTER)
Surround L/R (SURROUND L/R)
Surround Back L/R (SURROUND BACK L/R)*
* Assignable (SURROUND BACK, BI-AMP)
Subwoofer Out ..............................................1 (SUBWOOFER)
Rec Out ...................................................................1 (AV OUT)
Headphone Out.....................................................1 (PHONES)
• Video
Monitor Out
Composite ............................................................................1
Component...........................................................................1
Rec Out
Composite ............................................................1 (AV OUT)
• Output.................................................................1 (HDMI OUT)
• HDMI Specification
Deep Color
“x.v.Color”
Auto Lip Sync
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
3D Video
• Video Format
Repeater Mode
VGA
480i@60 Hz
576i@50 Hz
480p@60 Hz
576p@50 Hz
1080i@50/60 Hz
720p@50/60 Hz
1080p@24/50/60 Hz
Analog Up Conversion
480i@60 Hz (NTSC)
576i@50 Hz (PAL)
480p@60 Hz
576p@50 Hz
1080i@50/60 Hz
720p@50/60 Hz
Up-Scaling
480i → 480p/720p/1080i/1080p
480p → 720p/1080i/1080p
576i → 576p/720p/1080i/1080p
576p → 720p/1080i/1080p
Compatible Decoding Format
• Decoding Format
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital EX
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS Express
DTS
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
DTS 96/24
• Post Decoding Format
Dolby Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic II Music
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
DTS Neo:6 Music
DTS Neo:6 Cinema
• Audio Format
Dolby Digital
DTS
DSD (6ch)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
PCM (2ch to 8ch, Max 192 kHz/24 bit)
• Content Protection ........................................HDCP compatible
• Link Function .................................................. CEC compatible
En
94
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (1 channel driven)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
[Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R .....................................................................105 W/ch
Center.........................................................................105 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................105 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .....................................................105 W/ch
• Rated Output Power (2 channels driven simultaneously)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ................................................................. 85 W+85 W
Center................................................................................85 W
Surround L/R .......................................................... 85 W+85 W
Surround Back L/R ................................................. 85 W+85 W
• Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
[China, Korea, Asia and General models]
Front L/R .....................................................................135 W/ch
Center.........................................................................135 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .....................................................135 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)...................................110/130/160/180 W
[Other models]
Front L/R (6/4/2 Ω).............................................110/130/150 W
• Dynamic Headroom
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω................................................................................ 0.23 dB
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω............................. 120 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 Ω)............................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) .............................2.3 V
• Output Level / Output Impedance
AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, Front: Small) ................. 1 V/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance
AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ..............................100 mV/470 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ...........................+0/-3 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
AV5 etc. (DIRECT, Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out)
......................................................................... 100 dB or more
• Channel Separation
AV5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................. 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono ................................................................................. 0.3%
Stereo................................................................................ 0.5%
• Volume Control
Range ............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB
• Antenna Input ............................................... 75 Ω unbalanced
• Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)
Bass Boost/Cut ............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ......................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover ............................................................. 3.5 kHz
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back) ...... 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................ NTSC
[Other models] ................................................................... PAL
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .....................NTSC/PAL
• Video Signal Level
Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-Video [U.K. and Europe models]
Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
C .................................................................. 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Cb/Cr ............................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
AM section
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model]....................AC 110-120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] .............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ....................................... AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................270 W/320 VA
[Other models]................................................................ 280 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off / Standby Through Off ..............0.1 W or less
HDMI Control On / Standby Through On..............1.2 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models]............................................. 490 W
• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)...1.5 Vp-p
• Dimensions (W x H x D)............................435 x 151 x 363 mm
(17-1/8" x 6" x 14-5/16")
• Video Signal to Noise Ratio ................................50 dB or more
• Weight............................................................. 8.3 kg (18.3 lbs)
• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component ............................................ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB
FM Section
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
.......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono................................................................................ 72 dB
Stereo .............................................................................. 70 dB
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................. 150 µV or less
En
95
© 2011 Yamaha Corporation
YD340B0/OMEN
UAB
AV Receiver
For more detailed information, refer to the Owner’s Manual on the CD-ROM. To view the
Owner’s Manual, click on “English” in the screen displayed automatically when you insert the
CD-ROM into your PC, or click on the model name if the screen to select models is displayed,
and then click on “English” in the next screen. Then, follow the onscreen instructions.
If the screen is not displayed automatically, open the “index.html” in the CD-ROM.
Caution: Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM in an audio player.
The Owner’s Manual contained in the CD-ROM can be downloaded from the following website.
http://download.yamaha.com/
Safety Brochure
A (Power key)
Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby mode.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
•
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is
intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the
presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the
provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the
obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods
of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has
been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets
FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your
authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only
high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all
installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in
FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements
provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to
the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of
other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all
installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by
turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC
line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300
ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer
authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please
contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., USA. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA 90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of
America or its subsidiaries.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
2 En
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner's Manual in a safe place
for future reference.
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should
be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below.
Note
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is
hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet.
■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the
coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want
you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the
sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most
importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud
sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries
Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from
excessive volume levels.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place - away from direct sunlight, heat
sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. For proper ventilation, allow the following minimum
clearances.
Top: 30 cm, Rear: 20 cm, Sides: 20 cm
Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming
sounds.
Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in
an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this
unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed
to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user
and/or damage to this unit.
Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation.
If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete.
Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage.
Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is
dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held
responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall
outlet or this unit during a lightning storm.
Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power
plug from the wall outlet.
Be sure to refer to the “Troubleshooting” section of the Owner’s Manual on the CD-ROM for
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
Before moving this unit, press A to set it to standby mode and disconnect the AC power plug from the
wall outlet.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage
BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:
............................................................................................................AC 110-120/220-240V, 50/60Hz
Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature changes suddenly. Disconnect the power
cable from the outlet, then leave this unit alone.
When using this unit for a long time, this unit may become warm. Turn the power off, then leave this
unit alone for cooling.
Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily.
22 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. When you
dispose of batteries, follow your regional regulations.
23 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss.
24 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the same type. Danger of explosion may
happen if batteries are incorrectly replaced.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall
outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off by A. This state is called the standby mode. In this
state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
■ Notes on remote controls and batteries
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
• Insert the battery according to the polarity markings (+ and -).
• Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control narrows
– the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim
• If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the remote control to prevent an explosion or
acid leak.
• If you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries immediately, taking care not to touch the leaked
material. If the leaked material comes into contact with your skin or gets into your eyes or mouth, rinse
it away immediately and consult a doctor. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing
new batteries.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones. This may shorten the life of the new batteries or cause
old batteries to leak.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Specification
of batteries may be different even though they look the same.
• Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. In such a case, install new batteries and set
the remote control code.
• Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.
3 En
Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland
Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs
guarantee service, please contact the dealer from whom it was purchased. If you experience any difficulty,
please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our website
(http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident).
The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years
from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha undertakes, subject to the conditions listed below, to have
the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge for parts
or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and
condition, where a model has been discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair.
Conditions
1
2
3
4
The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name)
MUST accompany the defective product, along with a statement detailing the fault. In the absence of
this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and
the product may be returned at the customer’s expense.
The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European
Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland.
The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in
writing by Yamaha.
The following are excluded from this guarantee:
a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear.
b. Damage resulting from:
5
6
7
8
(1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party.
(2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please
note that it is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the product is adequately packaged when
returning the product for repair.
(3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in
accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper use, maintenance and storage, and (b)
installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in
force in the country where it is used.
(4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond
Yamaha’s control.
(5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third
party products.
(6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product
does not conform to the technical or safety standards of the country of use and/or to the standard
specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland.
Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the
guarantee of the country of use shall apply.
Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or
otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the product.
Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration
or loss to such settings or data.
This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force
or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising from their sales/purchase contract.
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and Used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives
2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could
otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased
the items.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
© 2011 Yamaha Corporation
Printed in Malaysia
WW93470
List of remote control codes
Liste des codes de commande
Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder
Elenco dei codici di telecomando
TV
A.R. Systems
Acme
Acura
ADC
Admiral
0320
0342
0323, 0343
0337
0054, 0178, 0336, 0337,
0339, 0346, 0347
Advent
0158
Adventura
0057
Adyson
0277, 0282, 0342
Agashi
0277, 0282
Agazi
0337
Aiko
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343
Aim
0320
Aiwa
0078, 0379
Akai
0050, 0055, 0109, 0159,
0181, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0340, 0343, 0349,
0350
Akiba
0320, 0340
Akura
0320, 0323, 0337, 0340
Alaron
0277
Alba
0161, 0277, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0351, 0372, 0382
Albatron
0140
Alcyon
0171
Alleron
0059
Allorgan
0282
Allstar
0320, 0350
America Action 0179
AMOi
0276
Amplivision
0161, 0282, 0321, 0342
Amstrad
0320, 0323, 0337, 0340,
0343
Amtron
Anam
Anam National
Anglo
Anitech
0058
0179, 0343
0052, 0058
0323, 0343
0171, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0343
Ansonic
0161, 0168, 0320, 0323,
0341, 0343
AOC
0008, 0026, 0050, 0053
Apex
0039, 0111, 0217
Arcam
0277, 0282
Arcam Delta
0342
Aristona
0320, 0349, 0350
Arthur Martin 0321
ASA
0339, 0347
Asberg
0171, 0320, 0350
Astra
0343
Asuka
0277, 0282, 0337, 0340,
0342
Atlantic
0277, 0320, 0342, 0349,
0350
Atori
0323, 0343
Auchan
0321
Audiosonic
0161, 0282, 0320, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0349, 0350
AudioTon
0161, 0282, 0342
Audiovox
0058, 0179, 0194
Ausind
0171
Autovox
0171, 0282, 0337, 0339,
0342
Aventura
0051
Awa
0277, 0282
Axion
0156
Baird
0282
Bang & Olufsen 0180, 0339
Basic Line
0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0350
Bastide
0282, 0342
Lista de códigos de mando a distancia
Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes
Baur
Bazin
Beko
Belcor
Bell & Howell
Benq
Beon
Best
Bestar
Binatone
Blue Sky
Blue Star
Boots
BPL
Bradford
Brandt
Brillian
Brinkmann
Brionvega
Britannia
Brockwood
Broksonic
Bruns
BTC
Bush
Candle
Capsonic
Carena
Carnivale
Carrefour
Carver
Cascade
Casio
0320, 0349
0282
0161, 0269, 0294, 0302,
0311, 0320, 0328, 0351
0008
0019, 0054
0097, 0242, 0361
0320, 0349, 0350
0161
0161, 0320, 0350
0282, 0342
0320, 0340
0348
0282, 0342
0320, 0348
0058, 0179
0322, 0345
0182
0320
0320, 0339, 0349, 0350
0277, 0282, 0342
0008
0109, 0179
0339
0340
0269, 0282, 0283, 0304,
0320, 0323, 0328, 0332,
0340, 0343, 0344, 0346,
0348, 0349, 0350, 0372,
0382, 0463, 0470, 0472
0008, 0026, 0050, 0057
0337
0320
0050
0344
0010
0320, 0323, 0343
0367
Cathay
CCE
Celebrity
Celera
Centurion
Century
CGE
Changhong
Chimei
Cimline
Citizen
0320, 0349, 0350
0183, 0282
0055, 0107
0039
0320, 0349, 0350
0339
0161, 0171
0039
0273
0323, 0343
0007, 0008, 0026, 0050,
0058
City
0323, 0343
Clarion
0179
Clarivox
0349
Clatronic
0161, 0171, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0350, 0351
CMS
0277
CMS Hightec 0282
Coby
0197
Colortyme
0008, 0026
Commercial Solutions
0021
Concerto
0008, 0026
Concorde
0323, 0343
Condor
0161, 0277, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0350, 0351
Contec
0179, 0277, 0323, 0342,
0343, 0344
Contec/Cony
0012, 0058
Continental Edison
0345
Cosmel
0323, 0343
Craig
0058, 0179
Crosley
0010, 0037, 0171, 0339
1
Crown
0058, 0161, 0171, 0179,
0320, 0323, 0343, 0349,
0350, 0351
CS Electronics 0277, 0340, 0342
CTC Clatronic 0341
CTX
0205
Curtis Mathes 0007, 0008, 0010, 0019,
0021, 0026, 0049, 0050,
0178
CXC
0058, 0179
Cybertron
0340
Cytron
0152
Daewoo
0007, 0008, 0026, 0037,
0053, 0167, 0266, 0275,
0277, 0282, 0315, 0320,
0323, 0331, 0335, 0342,
0343, 0350, 0381, 0465
Dainichi
0277, 0340
Dansai
0277, 0282, 0320, 0337,
0349, 0350
Dantax
0161, 0349
Dawa
0320
Daytron
0007, 0008, 0026, 0323,
0343
De Graaf
0346
Decca
0282, 0320, 0342, 0349,
0350
Dell
0145, 0245
Denver
0358, 0362
Desmet
0320, 0349, 0350
Diamant
0320
Diamond
0277
DiamondVision 0135, 0143
Dimensia
0049
Disney
0219
Dixi
0282, 0320, 0323, 0343,
0349, 0350
Dream Vision 0461, 0498
DTS
0323, 0343
Dual
0282, 0320, 0342
Dual-Tec
0342, 0343
Dumont
0008, 0030, 0062, 0282,
0339, 0341, 0342
Durabrand
0031, 0051, 0179, 0215
Dux
0349
Dwin
0178
Dynatron
0320, 0349, 0350
Dynex
0228, 0231
Elbe
0161, 0168, 0282, 0320
Elcit
0339
Electa
ELECTRO TECH
Electroband
Electrograph
Electrohome
Element
Elin
0348
0343
0055, 0107
0176
0008, 0026, 0052, 0055
0230
0277, 0320, 0323, 0342,
0349, 0350
Elite
0320, 0340, 0350
Elman
0341
Elta
0277, 0323, 0343
Emerson
0000, 0007, 0008, 0012,
0013, 0019, 0026, 0031,
0037, 0051, 0058, 0059,
0161, 0179, 0320, 0339
Emprex
0154
Envision
0008, 0026, 0050
Epson
0155, 0206, 0359
Erres
0320, 0349, 0350
ESA
0051
ESC
0282
Etron
0343
Eurofeel
0282
Euro-Feel
0337
Euroline
0349
Euroman
0161, 0277, 0282
Euromann
0320, 0337, 0342, 0350
Europhon
0277, 0282, 0320, 0341,
0342, 0350
Expert
0321
Exquisit
0320
Fenner
0323, 0343
Ferguson
0322, 0345, 0349
Fidelity
0277, 0320, 0342, 0346
Filsai
0282
Finlandia
0346
Finlux
0171, 0282, 0320, 0339,
0341, 0342, 0349, 0350
FIRST LINE
0342, 0343, 0350
Firstline
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323
Fisher
0019, 0161, 0282, 0339,
0342, 0344, 0351
Flint
0320, 0350
Formenti
0171, 0277, 0336, 0339,
0342, 0349
Formenti/Phoenix 0277
Fortress
0336, 0339
Fraba
0161, 0320
Friac
0161
Frontech
0282, 0323, 0337, 0343,
0346, 0347
Fujitsu
0059, 0069, 0074, 0075,
0282
Fujitsu General 0282
Fujitsu Siemens 0504, 0505, 0507, 0510,
0511
Funai
0051, 0058, 0059, 0112,
0113, 0115, 0118, 0119,
0179, 0337
Futuretech
0058, 0179
Galaxi
0320, 0351
Galaxis
0161, 0320
Gateway
0176, 0177, 0241
GBC
0323, 0343, 0344
GE
0008, 0021, 0023, 0026,
0027, 0031, 0034, 0049,
0052, 0056, 0209
Geant Casino
0321
GEC
0282, 0320, 0342, 0347,
0349, 0350
Geloso
0323, 0343, 0346
General Technic 0323, 0343
Genexxa
0320, 0340, 0347, 0350
GFM
0128, 0227
Giant
0282
Gibralter
0008, 0030, 0050, 0062
GoldHand
0277
Goldline
0320
GoldStar
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026,
0031, 0050, 0053, 0161,
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343, 0346, 0349,
0350
Goodmans
0246, 0272, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0350, 0462, 0473,
0477
Gorenje
0161, 0351
GPM
0340
GPX
0129
Gradiente
0240
Graetz
0347
Granada
0171, 0282, 0320, 0321,
0342, 0344, 0346, 0349,
0350
Grandin
0340, 0343, 0348, 0349
Gronic
0282
Grundig
0160, 0161, 0171, 0310,
0320
Grunpy
Haier
Halifax
Hallmark
Hampton
Hanseatic
0058, 0059, 0179
0157, 0233
0277, 0282, 0337, 0342
0008, 0026, 0031
0277, 0282, 0342
0161, 0168, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0342, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0350
Hantarex
0320, 0323, 0343
Hantor
0320
Harman/Kardon 0010
Harvard
0058, 0179
Harwood
0320, 0323
Havermy
0178
HCM
0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0342, 0343, 0348
Hema
0282, 0323
Hewlett Packard 0192
Higashi
0277
HiLine
0320
Hinari
0320, 0323, 0340, 0343,
0344, 0349, 0350
Hisawa
0321, 0340, 0348
Hisense
0247
Hitachi
0008, 0012, 0026, 0066,
0084, 0092, 0093, 0120,
0172, 0173, 0255, 0270,
0271, 0282, 0320, 0335,
0338, 0342, 0344, 0346,
0347, 0365, 0382, 0448,
0456, 0467, 0482
Hornyphon
0320, 0350
Hoshai
0340
Huanyu
0277, 0342
Hygashi
0277, 0282, 0342
Hyper
0277, 0282, 0323, 0342,
0343
Hypson
0282, 0320, 0321, 0337,
0342, 0348, 0349, 0350
Hyundai
0141
Iberia
0320
ICE
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0340, 0342, 0343,
0350
ICeS
0277
Ilo
0148, 0153
IMA
0058
Imperial
0161, 0171, 0320, 0347,
0350, 0351
Indiana
0320, 0349, 0350
2
Infinity
InFocus
Ingelen
Ingersol
Initial
Inno Hit
Innovation
Insignia
Inteq
Interactive
Interbuy
Interfunk
International
Intervision
Irradio
Isukai
ITC
ITS
ITT
ITV
Janeil
JBL
JC Penney
JCB
Jensen
JVC
Kaisui
Kamosonic
Kamp
Kapsch
Karcher
Kawasho
KEC
Kendo
Kenwood
KIC
Kingsley
0010
0250, 0327, 0363, 0479,
0508
0347
0323, 0343
0153
0171, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0349,
0350
0337, 0343
0131, 0228, 0236, 0238
0030
0161
0323, 0343
0161, 0320, 0339, 0347,
0349, 0350
0277
0161, 0282, 0320, 0337,
0341, 0342
0171, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0349, 0350
0320, 0340
0282, 0342
0277, 0320, 0340, 0348,
0350
0343, 0347
0320, 0343, 0349
0057
0010
0007, 0008, 0026, 0027,
0049, 0053, 0056
0055, 0107
0008, 0026
0012, 0014, 0015, 0056,
0064, 0065, 0067, 0169,
0174, 0297, 0314, 0344,
0350, 0375
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0348
0342
0277, 0342
0347
0161, 0320, 0342, 0343,
0349
0008, 0026, 0055, 0277
0179
0161, 0320, 0341, 0346
0008, 0026, 0050
0282
0277, 0342
KLH
Kloss Novabeam
Kneissel
Kolster
Konka
Korpel
Korting
Kosmos
Koyoda
KTV
Kyoto
Lasat
Lenco
Lenoir
Leyco
LG
LG/GoldStar
Liesenk
Liesenkotter
Life
Lifetec
Lloyds
Loewe
Loewe Opta
Logik
Luma
Lumatron
Lux May
Luxman
Luxor
LXI
M Electronic
MAG
Magnadyne
Magnafon
0039
0057, 0058
0161, 0168, 0320
0320, 0350
0340
0320, 0349, 0350
0161, 0339
0320
0343
0007, 0050, 0058, 0179,
0183, 0282, 0342
0277, 0282
0161
0323, 0343
0323, 0342, 0343
0320, 0337, 0349, 0350
0031, 0053, 0066, 0116,
0117, 0140, 0161, 0164,
0175, 0195, 0269, 0277,
0282, 0300, 0309, 0317,
0320, 0323, 0328, 0342,
0343, 0346, 0349, 0350,
0366, 0368, 0377, 0466,
0471, 0478
0164
0349
0320
0337, 0343
0320, 0323, 0337, 0343
0323
0161, 0168, 0265, 0320,
0330, 0352
0339, 0349, 0350
0054
0320, 0323, 0346, 0349
0282, 0320, 0346, 0349,
0350
0350
0008, 0026
0282, 0342, 0346
0010, 0019, 0021, 0026,
0027, 0031, 0049, 0111
0342, 0343, 0345, 0347,
0349, 0350
0096
0339, 0341, 0349
0171, 0277, 0341, 0342
Magnavox
0008, 0009, 0010, 0013,
0026, 0032, 0033, 0048,
0050, 0128, 0211, 0212,
0224, 0226, 0239
Magnum
0337, 0343
Majestic
0054
Mandor
0337
Manesth
0282, 0320, 0337, 0342,
0349, 0350
Marantz
0008, 0010, 0026, 0050,
0204, 0320, 0349, 0350
Marelli
0339
Mark
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0349, 0350
Masuda
0282
Matsui
0282, 0320, 0323, 0342,
0343, 0344, 0346, 0349,
0350, 0455
Matsushita
0017
Maxent
0147, 0176
Mediator
0320, 0349, 0350
Medion
0320, 0337, 0343
Megapower
0140
Megatron
0026, 0031
MElectronic
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323
Melvox
0321
Memorex
0019, 0026, 0031, 0053,
0054, 0137, 0215, 0323,
0343
Memphis
0323, 0343
Mercury
0320, 0323
Metz
0339
MGA
0008, 0026, 0031, 0050,
0053
Micromaxx
0337, 0343
Microstar
0337, 0343
Midland
0007, 0021, 0023, 0027,
0030, 0056, 0062
Minerva
0171
Minoka
0320, 0350
Mintek
0153
Mitsubishi
0008, 0026, 0031, 0053,
0066, 0084, 0093, 0098,
0150, 0178, 0289, 0320,
0339, 0344, 0350, 0376
Mivar
0161, 0168, 0171, 0277,
0282, 0342
Monivision
0140
Montgomery Ward
0054
Motion
Motorola
MTC
Multi System
Multitech
Murphy
NAD
Naonis
NEC
Neckermann
NEI
Net-TV
Neufunk
New Tech
New World
NewTech
Nicamagic
Nikkai
Nikko
Nobliko
Nokia
Norcent
Nordic
Nordmende
Nordvision
Novatronic
Oceanic
Okano
Olevia
ONCEAS
Onwa
Opera
Oppo
Optimus
Optoma
Optonica
Orbit
0171
0052, 0178
0008, 0026, 0050, 0053,
0161, 0277
0349
0058, 0161, 0179, 0183,
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0341, 0342, 0343, 0344,
0346, 0349
0277, 0342
0026, 0031, 0111
0346
0008, 0026, 0050, 0052,
0053, 0072, 0103, 0282,
0344
0161, 0282, 0320, 0339,
0342, 0346, 0349, 0350,
0351
0320, 0349, 0350
0176
0320, 0323
0343, 0350
0340
0282, 0320, 0323
0277, 0342
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0340, 0342, 0349,
0350
0026, 0031, 0050
0171, 0277, 0341, 0342
0347
0201
0282
0339, 0345, 0347, 0350
0349
0320
0321, 0347
0161, 0320, 0351
0102, 0199, 0200, 0207,
0222
0342
0058, 0179
0320
0130
0017, 0019
0144
0178
0320, 0350
3
Orion
0043, 0146, 0283, 0320,
0323, 0328, 0343, 0349,
0350
Orline
0320
Osaki
0282, 0320, 0337, 0340,
0342
Oso
0340
Otto Versand
0282, 0320, 0336, 0342,
0344, 0348, 0349, 0350
Pael
0277, 0342
Palladium
0161, 0282, 0320, 0342,
0351
Palsonic
0282
Panama
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0342, 0343
Panasonic
0016, 0017, 0020, 0022,
0023, 0035, 0052, 0056,
0084, 0085, 0133, 0163,
0193, 0284, 0286, 0290,
0292, 0320, 0325, 0347,
0356, 0483
Panavision
0320
Pathe Cinema 0161, 0168, 0277, 0321,
0342
Pausa
0323, 0343
Penney
0021, 0023, 0031, 0050,
0111
Perdio
0277, 0320
Perfekt
0320
Philco
0008, 0009, 0010, 0012,
0026, 0050, 0052, 0053,
0161, 0171, 0320, 0339
Philharmonic
0282, 0342
Philips
0008, 0009, 0010, 0011,
0012, 0032, 0048, 0049,
0052, 0122, 0128, 0134,
0186, 0187, 0213, 0221,
0224, 0226, 0239, 0256,
0257, 0259, 0261, 0263,
0267, 0280, 0281, 0287,
0296, 0299, 0301, 0303,
0305, 0313, 0319, 0320,
0324, 0333, 0339, 0342,
0349, 0350, 0353, 0357,
0360, 0380, 0383, 0452,
0459, 0460
Philips Magnavox 0011, 0032, 0033
Phoenix
0161, 0277, 0320, 0339,
0349, 0350
Phonola
0277, 0320, 0339, 0349,
0350
Pilot
0007, 0008, 0050
Pioneer
0008, 0026, 0094, 0095,
0161, 0320, 0345, 0347,
0349, 0350, 0458, 0480
Plantron
0320, 0323, 0337, 0350
Playsonic
0282
Polaroid
0039, 0142, 0202, 0234
Poppy
0323, 0343
Portland
0007, 0008, 0026, 0053
Prandoni-Prince 0171, 0346
Precision
0282, 0342
Prima
0157, 0243, 0323, 0343,
0347
Princeton
0140
Prism
0023, 0056
Profex
0323, 0343
Profi-Tronic
0320, 0350
Proline
0320, 0350
Proscan
0021, 0027, 0049
Prosonic
0161, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0342, 0349
Protech
0282, 0337, 0341, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
Proton
0008, 0012, 0026, 0031
Protron
0196
PROVIEW
0096, 0246
Provision
0320, 0349
Pulsar
0008, 0030, 0062
Pye
0256, 0320, 0349, 0350,
0378
Pymi
0323, 0343
Quandra Vision 0321
Quasar
0017, 0023, 0052, 0056
Quelle
0282, 0320, 0337, 0342,
0349, 0350
Questa
0344
Radialva
0320
RadioShack
0019, 0021, 0031, 0050,
0179, 0320
RadioShack/Realistic
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026,
0049, 0058
Radiola
0282, 0320, 0349, 0350
Radiomarelli
0320, 0339
Radiotone
0161, 0320, 0323, 0350
Rank
0344
RCA
0008, 0021, 0024, 0025,
0026, 0027, 0042, 0049,
0052, 0053, 0063, 0136,
0225
Realistic
0019, 0031, 0050, 0179
Recor
0320
Redstar
0320
Reflex
0320
Revox
0161, 0320, 0349, 0350
Rex
0337, 0346, 0347
RFT
0161, 0168, 0339
Rhapsody
0277
R-Line
0320, 0349, 0350
Roadstar
0323, 0337, 0340, 0343
Robotron
0339
Rowa
0277, 0282
Royal Lux
0161
RTF
0339
Runco
0030, 0050, 0062
Saba
0298, 0322, 0339, 0345,
0347
Saisho
0282, 0323, 0337, 0342,
0343
Salora
0346, 0347
Sambers
0171, 0341
Sampo
0007, 0008, 0026, 0050,
0176
Samsung
0004, 0005, 0006, 0007,
0008, 0012, 0026, 0031,
0036, 0050, 0053, 0076,
0077, 0079, 0114, 0124,
0125, 0126, 0127, 0139,
0161, 0183, 0185, 0190,
0191, 0258, 0264, 0277,
0282, 0320, 0323, 0334,
0337, 0342, 0343, 0349,
0350, 0351, 0373, 0453,
0468
Sandra
0277, 0282, 0342
Sansui
0043, 0109, 0320, 0350
Sanyo
0008, 0019, 0068, 0070,
0071, 0099, 0161, 0168,
0223, 0237, 0277, 0282,
0288, 0295, 0323, 0342,
0344, 0369, 0469
SBR
0320, 0349
Sceptre
0235, 0244
Schaub Lorenz 0347
Schneider
Scotch
Scott
Sears
SEG
SEI
SEI-Sinudyne
Seleco
Sencora
Sentra
Serino
Sharp
Sheng Chia
Shogun
Siarem
Sierra
Siesta
Signature
Silva
Silver
Singer
Sinudyne
Skantic
Solavox
Sonitron
Sonoko
Sonolor
Sontec
Sony
0282, 0316, 0318, 0320,
0333, 0340, 0342, 0349,
0350, 0382
0026, 0031
0008, 0012, 0026, 0031,
0058, 0059, 0149, 0179
0008, 0010, 0019, 0021,
0026, 0027, 0031, 0049,
0051, 0059, 0111
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0341, 0342, 0344,
0349, 0382
0320
0339, 0341, 0347
0344, 0346, 0347
0323, 0343
0323
0277
0000, 0001, 0002, 0003,
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026,
0060, 0088, 0089, 0091,
0138, 0165, 0170, 0178,
0198, 0229, 0262, 0278,
0279, 0291, 0308, 0312,
0336, 0344, 0354, 0370,
0449, 0450, 0451, 0464,
0474, 0476, 0481
0178
0008
0320, 0339, 0341
0320, 0350
0161
0054
0277
0344
0321, 0339, 0341
0320, 0339, 0341, 0349
0347
0347
0161, 0282
0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0342, 0343, 0349, 0350
0321, 0347
0161, 0320, 0349, 0350
0038, 0044, 0045, 0047,
0055, 0090, 0104, 0105,
0107, 0110, 0123, 0184,
0220, 0248, 0249, 0251,
4
0252, 0254, 0326, 0343,
0344, 0371, 0374, 0457,
0475, 0486
Sound & Vision 0340, 0341
Soundesign
0008, 0026, 0031, 0058,
0059, 0179
Soundwave
0320, 0349, 0350
Squareview
0051
SSS
0008, 0058, 0179
Standard
0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0350
Starlite
0058, 0179, 0320, 0323,
0349
Stenway
0348
Stern
0346, 0347
Strato
0320, 0323
Stylandia
0282
Sunkai
0343
Sunstar
0320, 0323
Sunwood
0320, 0323, 0343, 0350
Superla
0277, 0282, 0342
Superscan
0013, 0178
SuperTech
0277, 0320, 0323
Supra
0323, 0343
Supre-Macy
0057
Supreme
0055, 0107
Susumu
0340
Sutron
0323, 0343
SVA
0151
Sydney
0277, 0282, 0342
Sylvania
0008, 0009, 0010, 0011,
0013, 0026, 0048, 0050,
0051, 0128, 0227, 0253
Symphonic
0051, 0058, 0062, 0128,
0179, 0215
Syntax
0199
Syntax-Brillian 0199
Sysline
0349
Sytong
0277
Tandy
0178, 0282, 0336, 0340,
0342, 0347
Tashiko
0277, 0282, 0342, 0344,
0346
Tatung
0052, 0177, 0282, 0320,
0342, 0349, 0350
TCM
0337, 0343
Teac
0282, 0320
Tec
0282, 0323, 0342, 0343
Technics
0017, 0023, 0056
TechniSat
0274, 0496, 0497, 0499
Techwood
TEDELEX
Teknika
0008, 0023, 0026, 0056
0282
0007, 0008, 0010, 0012,
0026, 0053, 0054, 0058,
0059, 0179
Teleavia
0345
Telecor
0282, 0320
Telefunken
0320, 0322, 0345, 0350
Telegazi
0320
Telemeister
0320
Telesonic
0320
Telestar
0320
Teletech
0320, 0323, 0343, 0349
Teleton
0282, 0342
Televideon
0277
Televiso
0321
Tensai
0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0350
Tesmet
0350
Tevion
0337, 0343
Texet
0277, 0282, 0323, 0342
Thomson
0162, 0188, 0189, 0285,
0320, 0322, 0342, 0345,
0350
Thorn
0320, 0349
TMK
0008, 0026, 0031
TNCi
0030
Tokai
0282, 0320, 0350
Tokyo
0277, 0342
Tomashi
0348
Toshiba
0018, 0019, 0040, 0041,
0046, 0073, 0100, 0103,
0108, 0109, 0111, 0121,
0132, 0166, 0208, 0210,
0214, 0217, 0260, 0268,
0282, 0283, 0293, 0304,
0306, 0307, 0329, 0344,
0355, 0454
Totevision
0007
Towada
0282, 0347
Trakton
0282
Trans Continens 0282, 0320
Transtec
0277
Trident
0282
Triumph
0320
Uher
0161, 0171, 0320, 0347,
0350
Ultravox
0277, 0320, 0339, 0341,
0342
Unic Line
0320
United
Universum
0349
0161, 0171, 0282, 0320,
0337, 0349, 0350, 0351
Univox
0320
Vector Research 0050
Vestel
0282, 0320, 0346, 0347,
0349, 0350, 0351
Vexa
0320, 0323, 0343, 0349
Victor
0015, 0344, 0350
VIDEOLOGIC 0277
Videologique
0277, 0282, 0340, 0342
VideoSystem
0320, 0350
Videotechnic
0277, 0282
Vidikron
0010
Vidtech
0008, 0026, 0031, 0053
Viewsonic
0176, 0203, 0232, 0364
Viking
0057
Viore
0148
Visiola
0277, 0342
Vision
0282, 0320, 0350
Vizio
0008, 0177, 0218, 0242,
0500, 0501, 0502, 0503,
0506
Vortec
0320, 0349, 0350
Voxson
0171, 0320, 0339, 0346,
0347, 0350
Waltham
0282, 0320, 0342
Wards
0008, 0009, 0010, 0026,
0031, 0048, 0049, 0050,
0053, 0054, 0059
Watson
0320, 0349, 0350
Watt Radio
0277, 0341, 0342
Waycon
0111
Wega
0320, 0339, 0344
Wegavox
0323
Weltblick
0282, 0320, 0349, 0350
Westinghouse 0107, 0216, 0220
White Westinghouse
0037, 0090, 0277, 0320,
0341, 0342, 0349
Wincom
0101, 0106
Xrypton
0320
Yamaha
0008, 0026, 0050, 0053,
0080, 0081, 0082, 0083,
0086, 0087
Yamishi
0282, 0320
Yokan
0320
Yoko
0161, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
Yorx
Zanussi
Zenith
0340
0282, 0346
0008, 0028, 0029, 0030,
0031, 0054, 0061, 0062
VCR
ABS
Adventura
Adyson
Aiwa
Akai
Akiba
Akura
Alba
1016
1069
1008
1024, 1026, 1027, 1069
1021, 1027
1008, 1029
1008, 1027, 1029
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1029, 1030
Alienware
1016
Ambassador
1030
American High 1068
Amstrad
1008, 1009, 1026
Anitech
1008, 1029
Apex
1088
ASA
1028, 1031
Asha
1070
Asuka
1008, 1026, 1028, 1029,
1031
Audio Dynamics 1064
Audiosonic
1009
Audiovox
1071
Baird
1009, 1025, 1026, 1027
Bang & Olufsen 1017
Basic Line
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1029, 1030
Baur
1028
Beaumark
1070
Bell & Howell 1065
Bestar
1009, 1025, 1030
Black Panther Line
1009, 1025
Blaupunkt
1028
Bondstec
1008, 1030
Broksonic
1100
Bush
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1029, 1049, 1051, 1063,
1217
Calix
1071
Candle
1070, 1071
Canon
1068
Cathay
1009
5
Catron
CGE
Cimline
CineVision
Citizen
Clatronic
Colortyme
Condor
Craig
Crown
1030
1026, 1027
1008, 1024, 1029
1104
1070, 1071
1008, 1030
1064
1009, 1025, 1030
1070, 1071
1008, 1009, 1025, 1029,
1030
Curtis Mathes 1064, 1068, 1070
Cybernex
1070
CyberPower
1016
Daewoo
1009, 1025, 1030, 1038,
1069, 1223
Dansai
1008, 1009, 1029
Dantax
1024
Daytron
1009, 1025
DBX
1064
De Graaf
1028
Decca
1026, 1027, 1028
Dell
1016
Denko
1008
DiamondVision 1096
DigiFusion
1014
DIRECTV
1019, 1105, 1110, 1111,
1113, 1116, 1122
Dish Network 1018
Dishpro
1018
Dual
1009, 1027, 1028
Dumont
1026, 1028
Durabrand
1114
Dynatech
1069
Echostar
1018
Elbe
1009
Elcatech
1008
Electrohome
1071
Electrophonic 1071
Elsay
1008
Elta
1008, 1009, 1029
Emerson
1008, 1020, 1068, 1069,
1071
ESC
1009, 1025
Etzuko
1008, 1029
Expressvu
1018
Ferguson
1027
Fidelity
1008, 1026
Finlandia
1028
Finlux
1026, 1027, 1028
Firstline
Fisher
Flint
Formenti/Phoenix
Frontech
Fuji
Fujitsu
Funai
Galaxy
Garrard
Gateway
GBC
GE
GEC
Geloso
General
General Technic
GOI
GoldHand
Goldstar
Goodmans
1008, 1024, 1029, 1031
1065
1024
1028
1030
1068
1026
1026, 1069
1026
1069
1016
1029, 1030
1068, 1070
1028
1029
1030
1024
1018
1008, 1029
1026, 1031, 1064, 1071
1008, 1009, 1025, 1026,
1029, 1030, 1031
Gradiente
1069
Graetz
1027
Granada
1028
Grandin
1008, 1009, 1025, 1026,
1029, 1030, 1031
Grundig
1028, 1029
Hanseatic
1009, 1028, 1031
Harley Davidson 1069
Harman/Kardon 1064
Harwood
1008
HCM
1008, 1029
Headquarter
1065
Hewlett Packard 1016
Hinari
1008, 1009, 1024, 1029
Hisawa
1024
Hitachi
1011, 1026, 1027, 1028,
1046, 1062
HNS
1110
Howard Computers
1016
HP
1016
HTS
1018
Hughes
1111, 1113, 1122
Hughes Network Systems
1110, 1116
Humax
1012, 1110, 1113
Hush
1016
Hypson
1008, 1009, 1024, 1029
iBUYPOWER
Impego
Imperial
Inno Hit
Innovation
Instant Replay
Interbuy
Interfunk
Intervision
Irradio
ITT
ITV
JC Penney
JCL
JVC
Kaisui
Karcher
Kendo
Kenwood
Kodak
Korpel
Kyoto
Lenco
Leyco
LG
Lifetec
Linksys
Lloyd's
Loewe Opta
Logik
Lumatron
Luxor
LXI
M Electronic
Magnavox
Magnin
Manesth
Marantz
Mark
Marta
Matsui
1016
1030
1026
1008, 1009, 1025, 1028,
1029, 1030
1024
1068
1008, 1031
1028
1009, 1026
1008, 1029, 1031
1027
1009, 1025, 1031
1064, 1065, 1068, 1070,
1071
1068
1007, 1018, 1027, 1039,
1064, 1065, 1066, 1067,
1078, 1089, 1092, 1093,
1094, 1095, 1113, 1208,
1209, 1212, 1213, 1215,
1218
1008, 1029
1028
1008, 1024, 1025, 1030
1027, 1064, 1065
1068, 1071
1008, 1029
1008
1025
1008, 1029
1010, 1026, 1031, 1047,
1054, 1056, 1071, 1103,
1221
1024
1016
1069
1028, 1031
1008, 1029
1009, 1025
1008
1071
1026
1020, 1068, 1114, 1126
1071
1008, 1029
1028, 1064, 1065, 1068
1009
1071
1024, 1031
Matsushita
Media Center PC
Mediator
Medion
MEI
Memorex
1068
1016
1028
1024
1068
1023, 1026, 1031, 1065,
1068, 1069, 1070, 1071,
1098, 1114
Memphis
1008, 1029
MGN Technology 1070
Micromaxx
1024
Microsoft
1016
Microstar
1024
Migros
1026
Mind
1016
Mitsubishi
1026, 1028, 1079
Motorola
1068
MTC
1070
Multitech
1008, 1026, 1028, 1029,
1030, 1069, 1070
Murphy
1026
NEC
1027, 1064, 1065
Neckermann
1027, 1028
NEI
1028
Nesco
1008, 1029
Nikkai
1008, 1009, 1030
Nikko
1071
Niveus Media 1016
Noblex
1070
Nokia
1009, 1027
Nordmende
1027
Northgate
1016
Oceanic
1026, 1027
Okano
1008, 1009, 1024
Olympus
1068
Optimus
1071
Orion
1023, 1024, 1051, 1115,
1217
Orson
1026
Osaki
1008, 1026, 1029, 1031
Otto Versand
1028
Palladium
1008, 1027, 1029, 1031
Panasonic
1000, 1022, 1044, 1055,
1068, 1072, 1085, 1090,
1091, 1120, 1121, 1214
Pathe Marconi 1027
Perdio
1026
Philco
1008, 1068
6
Philips
1006, 1013, 1028, 1035,
1040, 1045, 1046, 1050,
1058, 1059, 1061, 1068,
1076, 1101, 1110, 1113,
1116, 1117, 1122, 1126,
1210, 1211
Philips Magnavox 1076
Phonola
1028
Pilot
1071
Pioneer
1028, 1036
Polaroid
1088, 1099
Portland
1009, 1025, 1030
Prinz
1026
Profex
1029
Proline
1026
Proscan
1019
Prosonic
1009, 1024
Pulsar
1114
Pye
1028, 1102
Quarter
1065
Quartz
1065
Quasar
1068
Quelle
1026, 1028
Radialva
1008
RadioShack
1071
RadioShack/Realistic
1065, 1068, 1069, 1070,
1071
Radiola
1028
Radix
1071
Randex
1071
RCA
1019, 1068, 1070, 1075,
1110, 1113, 1122, 1125
Realistic
1065, 1068, 1069, 1070,
1071
ReplayTV
1022, 1123
Rex
1027
RFT
1008, 1028, 1030
Ricavision
1016
Roadstar
1008, 1009, 1025, 1029,
1031
Royal
1008
Runco
1114
Saba
1027
Saisho
1024, 1029
Samsung
1002, 1034, 1041, 1043,
1057, 1060, 1070, 1084,
1110, 1116, 1122, 1124,
1220, 1222
Samurai
1008, 1030
Sanky
Sansui
Sanyo
Saville
SBR
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Sears
SEG
SEI-Sinudyne
Seleco
Sentra
Sentron
Sharp
Shintom
Shivaki
Shogun
Siemens
Silva
Silver
Singer
Sinudyne
Solavox
Sonic Blue
Sonneclair
Sonoko
Sontec
Sony
Stack
Stack 9
Standard
Stern
STS
Sunkai
Sunstar
Suntronic
Sunwood
Superscan
Sylvania
Symphonic
Systemax
Tagar Systems
Taisho
1114
1023, 1027, 1106, 1115
1032, 1065, 1070
1009
1028
1026, 1027
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1026, 1028, 1029, 1030,
1031
1065, 1068, 1071
1008, 1009, 1029
1028
1027
1008, 1030
1008, 1029
1003, 1033, 1077, 1107,
1127, 1219
1008, 1029
1031
1070
1031
1031
1009
1068
1028
1030
1022, 1123
1008
1009, 1025
1031
1001, 1016, 1048, 1053,
1073, 1074, 1080, 1081,
1082, 1083, 1108, 1118,
1216
1016
1016
1009, 1025
1009
1068
1024
1026
1026
1008, 1029
1020
1020, 1068, 1069, 1102,
1126
1008, 1069, 1126
1016
1016
1024
Tandberg
Tandy
Tashiko
Tatung
TCM
Teac
Tec
Technics
Teknika
Teleavia
Telefunken
Teletech
Tenosal
Tensai
Tevion
Thomson
Thorn
Tivo
1009
1065
1026, 1071
1026, 1027, 1028
1015, 1024, 1042
1009, 1069
1008, 1009, 1030
1068
1068, 1069, 1071
1027
1027
1008, 1009
1008, 1029
1008, 1026, 1029, 1031
1024
1005, 1027
1027
1108, 1110, 1111, 1113,
1117, 1118, 1119, 1122
TMK
1070
Tokai
1008, 1029, 1031
Tonsai
1029
Toshiba
1004, 1016, 1027, 1028,
1037, 1049, 1052, 1086,
1087, 1097, 1109, 1112,
1194
Totevision
1070, 1071
Touch
1016
Towada
1008, 1029
Towika
1008, 1029
TVA
1030
Uher
1031
UltimateTV
1019
Ultravox
1009
Unitech
1070
United Quick Star 1009, 1025
Universum
1026, 1028, 1031
Vector Research 1064
Video Concepts 1064
Videon
1024
Videosonic
1070
Viewsonic
1016
Voodoo
1016
Wards
1068, 1069, 1070, 1071
Weltblick
1031
XR-1000
1068, 1069
Yamaha
1064, 1065
Yamishi
1008, 1029
Yokan
1008, 1029
Yoko
1008, 1029, 1030, 1031
Zenith
ZT Group
1114
1016
DVD
4Kus
Accurian
Advent
AEG
Airis
Aiwa
Akai
Akura
Alba
2051
2142
2155, 2251
2362
2364
2322
2145, 2177, 2179, 2248
2356
2064, 2165, 2186, 2337,
2346
Alco
2149
Alize
2361
Allegro
2133
Amitech
2362
Amphion MediaWorks
2195
AMW
2195, 2363
Apex
2030, 2124, 2125, 2126,
2127, 2130, 2131
Apple
2241
Arrgo
2138
Asono
2364
Aspire
2152, 2222
Astar
2240
ATACOM
2364
Audiovox
2061, 2149
Avious
2367
Awa
2363
Axion
2249
Bang & Olufsen 2128
Baze
2367
BBK
2364
Bellagio
2363
Best Buy
2359
Blaupunkt
2131
Blue Parade
2157
Boghe
2382
Brainwave
2362
Brandt
2148, 2188
Broksonic
2145, 2146
Bush
2064, 2110, 2170, 2268,
2290, 2346, 2358, 2367,
2383
7
California Audio Labs
2151
Cambridge Audio 2354
CAT
2352, 2353
CAVS
2192
Centrum
2353
CGV
2354, 2362
Changhong
2140
Cinetec
2363
CineVision
2133, 2237
Clatronic
2358, 2367
Coby
2031, 2046, 2360
Conia
2383
Continental Edison
2363
Crown
2362
C-Tech
2355
Curtis Mathes 2139
CVG
2377
CyberHome
2022, 2098, 2138, 2187,
2336
Cytron
2244
Daenyx
2363
Daewoo
2001, 2133, 2276, 2298,
2330, 2362, 2363, 2377
Daewoo International
2363
Dalton
2357
Dansai
2362, 2381
Daytek
2184, 2195, 2363
Dayton
2363
DEC
2358
Decca
2362
Denon
2059, 2151, 2193, 2332
Denver
2356, 2358, 2360, 2370
Denzel
2380
Desay
2205
Diamond
2354, 2355
DiamondVision 2225, 2232
Disney
2010, 2028
DK Digital
2339
Dmtech
2176
Dual
2380
Durabrand
2136
DVX
2355
Easy Home
2359
Eclipse
2354
E-Dem
2364
Electrohome
2362
Elin
2362
Elta
2341, 2361, 2362
Emerson
2129, 2137, 2150
Enterprise
2129
Enzer
2380
Epson
2247
ESA
2137
Finlux
2354, 2362, 2367
Fintec
2377
Fisher
2134
Funai
2137
Gateway
2051
GE
2029, 2131, 2156
Gericom
2351
GFM
2226
Giec
2382
Global Solutions 2355
Global Sphere 2355
Go Video
2133, 2213
Goodmans
2165, 2280, 2291, 2358,
2371, 2376, 2382
GPX
2227
Gradiente
2151
Graetz
2380
Greenhill
2131
Grundig
2349
Grunkel
2362, 2366
GVG
2377
H&B
2358
H_her
2364
Haaz
2354, 2355
Haier
2254
Harman/Kardon 2047, 2135
HiMAX
2359
Hitachi
2062, 2090, 2115, 2274,
2282, 2316, 2359, 2380
Hiteker
2130
Home Tech Industries
2364
Hyundai
2366
Ilo
2245
Initial
2131, 2245
Innovation
2182
Insignia
2002, 2137, 2253
Integra
2157
Irradio
2053
iSymphony
2246
JBL
2135
JVC
2020, 2096, 2097, 2099,
2100, 2101, 2102, 2103,
2106, 2107, 2160, 2257,
Jwin
Kansai
Kawasaki
Kennex
Kenwood
KeyPlug
Kiiro
Kingavon
Kiss
KLH
Koda
Koss
KXD
Landel
Lasonic
Lawson
Lecson
Lenco
Lenoxx
LG
Life
Lifetec
Limit
Liquid Video
Liteon
Loewe
LogicLab
Magnavox
Magnex
Majestic
Marantz
Marquant
Matsui
McIntosh
Mecotek
Medion
Memorex
MiCO
Micromaxx
Microsoft
Microstar
Minoka
2260, 2262, 2263, 2321,
2324, 2326, 2327, 2343,
2464, 2465, 2468, 2469,
2471
2198
2360
2149
2362
2041, 2151, 2348
2362
2362
2358
2380
2131, 2149
2358
2013, 2148, 2158
2359
2143
2132
2355
2381
2358, 2362, 2367
2136, 2153
2002, 2033, 2038, 2057,
2129, 2133, 2189, 2191,
2223, 2238, 2270, 2288,
2335, 2373, 2375
2182
2182
2355
2158
2043, 2051, 2142
2320
2355
2025, 2050, 2137, 2150,
2159, 2224, 2230, 2358
2367
2360
2328
2362
2148, 2378
2199
2362
2182
2028, 2145, 2234
2354, 2382
2182
2156
2182
2362
Minowa
Mintek
Mitsubishi
Mizuda
Monyka
Mustek
Mx Onda
Mystral
Naiko
Nesa
Neufunk
Nevir
Next Base
Nexxtech
NU-TEC
Onkyo
Oopla
Oppo
Optim
Optimus
Orava
Orbit
Orion
Oritron
P&B
Pacific
Panasonic
Parasound
peeKTON
Philips
Phonotrend
Pioneer
2367
2131, 2245
2003
2358, 2359
2380
2186
2354
2366
2362
2131
2380
2362
2143
2243
2383
2159, 2368
2051
2196, 2255
2381
2180
2358
2363
2073, 2110
2148, 2158
2358
2355
2011, 2024, 2034, 2042,
2058, 2062, 2066, 2067,
2093, 2116, 2117, 2118,
2119, 2120, 2121, 2122,
2123, 2151, 2159, 2164,
2166, 2167, 2172, 2173,
2175, 2209, 2214, 2275,
2277, 2278, 2281, 2282,
2283, 2301, 2374, 2470
2197
2364
2008, 2012, 2025, 2044,
2050, 2051, 2053, 2060,
2072, 2108, 2111, 2147,
2159, 2163, 2169, 2174,
2181, 2185, 2230, 2261,
2266, 2267, 2286, 2287,
2289, 2295, 2300, 2302,
2317, 2328, 2338, 2342,
2350, 2467
2367
2016, 2017, 2018, 2019,
2035, 2092, 2094, 2095,
2109, 2157, 2180, 2190,
8
2212, 2269, 2272, 2299,
2304, 2305, 2306, 2307,
2308, 2309, 2310, 2311,
2344, 2345, 2347, 2379
Pointer
2362
Polaroid
2125, 2215, 2235
Portland
2362
Powerpoint
2363
Prima
2252
Proceed
2130
Proscan
2156
Prosonic
2360, 2377
Protron
2202
Provision
2358
Pye
2144
Qwestar
2148
Raite
2380
RCA
2021, 2029, 2104, 2105,
2131, 2149, 2156, 2157,
2229
RedStar
2356, 2360, 2362
Regent
2153
Reoc
2355
Rimax
2361
Rio
2133
Roadstar
2331, 2358
Ronin
2363
Rotel
2203
Rowa
2154, 2383
Rownsonic
2353
Saba
2148, 2188
Sabaki
2355
Saivod
2362
Sampo
2141
Samsung
2000, 2045, 2077, 2112,
2113, 2114, 2115, 2151,
2200, 2216, 2219, 2228,
2264, 2265, 2271, 2279,
2294, 2303, 2329, 2365
Sansui
2073, 2145, 2354, 2355,
2362
Sanyo
2134, 2145, 2217, 2292
ScanMagic
2186
Schaub Lorenz 2362
Schneider
2176
Scientific Labs 2355
Scott
2161, 2357
Seeltech
2364
SEG
2162, 2355, 2363, 2380
Sharp
2006, 2040, 2088, 2091,
2182, 2194, 2220, 2221,
2231, 2236, 2293, 2340
Shinsonic
2245
Sigmatek
2359, 2364
Silva
2356
Singer
2354, 2355
Skymaster
2325, 2355
Skyworth
2356
Slim Art
2362
SM Electronic 2355
Sonic Blue
2133
Sontech
2366
Sony
2004, 2005, 2007, 2009,
2014, 2015, 2023, 2026,
2027, 2052, 2068, 2069,
2070, 2071, 2074, 2075,
2084, 2085, 2087, 2168,
2171, 2208, 2210, 2211,
2258, 2273, 2284, 2285,
2312, 2313, 2314, 2315,
2318, 2319, 2466
Soundmaster
2355
Soundmax
2355
Spectra
2363
Spectroniq
2201
Standard
2355
Star Cluster
2355
Starmedia
2358, 2364
Sungale
2204
Sunkai
2362
Superscan
2150
Supervision
2355
Sylvania
2012, 2137, 2150, 2178,
2230, 2239
Symphonic
2108, 2230
Synn
2355
T.D.E. Systems 2366
Tatung
2001, 2362
TCM
2182, 2297
Teac
2149, 2333, 2355, 2383
Tec
2356
Technics
2151
Technika
2362, 2367
Telefunken
2353
Tensai
2362
Tevion
2182, 2355, 2357
Theta Digital
2157
Thomson
2183, 2188, 2334, 2372
Tokai
2356, 2380
Top Suxess
Toshiba
2364
2032, 2036, 2037, 2039,
2048, 2049, 2054, 2055,
2072, 2073, 2076, 2078,
2079, 2086, 2145, 2159,
2218, 2233, 2256, 2259,
2296, 2369
TRANScontinents 2363, 2367
Transonic
2367
Trio
2362
Trutech
2242
TruVision
2359
TSM
2364
Umax
2361
United
2367
Urban Concepts 2159
US Logic
2245
Venturer
2149
Viewmaster
2364
Vocopro
2206
VocoStar
2207
Waitec
2364
Welltech
2382
Westinghouse 2063, 2250
Wharfedale
2354, 2355
Woxter
2361, 2364
Xbox
2156, 2183
Xlogic
2355, 2362
XMS
2362
Xoro
2382
Yamada
2051, 2361, 2363
Yamaha
2056, 2064, 2065, 2080,
2081, 2082, 2083, 2089,
2118, 2151, 2323
Yamakawa
2363, 2380
Yukai
2186
Zenith
2002, 2129, 2133, 2159,
2223
Blu-ray Disc
JVC
LG
Panasonic
Pioneer
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Yamaha
2475
2033
2011, 2209, 2214
2212
2045, 2113
2194, 2220, 2221
2075
2064, 2474
DVR
Bush
Hitachi
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
RCA
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Toshiba
Victor
Yamaha
2110
2090
2066, 2067, 2093, 2116,
2117, 2119, 2120, 2122,
2123
2108, 2111
2016, 2017, 2018, 2019,
2092, 2094, 2095, 2109
2105
2113, 2219
2088, 2091
2084, 2085, 2087
2086, 2218
2475
2089, 2118
DVD Recorder
Aspire
Astar
Broksonic
Go Video
Hitachi
Insignia
Irradio
JVC
LG
Liteon
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Pye
Samsung
Sansui
Sanyo
Sony
Sylvania
Toshiba
Yamaha
2222
2240
2146
2213
2062
2002
2053
2100, 2101, 2106, 2107
2033, 2057, 2223, 2238
2043
2011, 2034, 2058, 2062,
2116, 2117, 2119, 2120,
2121, 2123
2008, 2044, 2050, 2051,
2147
2017, 2035
2144
2000, 2112, 2216
2073
2217
2004, 2005, 2007, 2052,
2068, 2069, 2074, 2208,
2210, 2211
2239
2032, 2036, 2037, 2039,
2049, 2054, 2055, 2076
2056
9
Cable
ABC
3002, 3003, 3017, 3066,
3067, 3086, 3093, 3119,
3122
ADB
3020
Adelphia
3081
Alcatel
3016
Americast
3124
Amstrad
3022, 3098
Antronix
3065, 3070
Archer
3070
Arcon
3098
AT&T
3095
Axis
3098
Bell South
3124
Cable Vision
3092
Cabletenna
3065
Cabletime
3104
Cableview
3087
Clearmaster
3127
ClearMax
3127
Clyde Cablevision 3105
Colour Voice
3068
Comcast
3084, 3088, 3117
Comcrypt
3107
Comtronics
3069
Contec
3074
Coolmax
3127
COX
3084
Cryptovision
3110
Director
3084
Eastern
3075
Everquest
3123
Fidelity
3098
Filmnet
3107
Filmnet Cablecrypt
3111
Filmnet Comcrypt
3111
Finlux
3097
Focus
3126
Foxtel
3022
France Telecom 3100, 3101
Freebox
3023
GC Electronics 3070
GE
3066, 3093
GEC
3105
Gemini
3072, 3123
General Instrument
3017, 3025, 3066, 3084,
3090, 3096, 3117
Goldstar
3120
Gooding
3099
Grundig
3098, 3099
Hamlin
3073, 3078
Hirschmann
3097
Hitachi
3066
HomeChoice
3106
Humax
3021, 3080, 3083
ITT Nokia
3097
Jasco
3123
Jerrold
3017, 3018, 3025, 3066,
3072, 3084, 3090, 3096,
3119, 3123
JVC
3099
Kabel Deutschland
3024, 3027, 3121
Macab
3101
Magnavox
3079
Maspro
3099
Matsui
3099
MegaCable
3117
Memorex
3076, 3122
Minerva
3099
Mnet
3107
Motorola
3025, 3026, 3084, 3088,
3090, 3095, 3117
Movie Time
3077, 3109
Mr Zapp
3101
Multichoice
3107
Multitech
3127
NEC
3064
NET Brazil
3085
Nokia
3097
Noos
3101
NSC
3077
Oak
3074
Pace
3006, 3089, 3121
Palladium
3099
Panasonic
3112, 3118, 3122
Paragon
3122
Philips
3068, 3071, 3079, 3099,
3100, 3101, 3103
Pioneer
3001, 3006, 3094, 3098,
3114, 3116, 3120
Popular Mechanics
3126
Proscan
3066, 3093
Pulsar
3122
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
3018
Quasar
3122
RadioShack
3123, 3127
RCA
3030, 3031, 3087, 3118
Realistic
3070
Recoton
3126
Regal
3078
Regency
3075
Rembrandt
3066
Runco
3122
Sagem
3101
Samsung
3069, 3089, 3114, 3120
SAT
3098
Scientific Atlanta 3000, 3001, 3002, 3003,
3006, 3028, 3029, 3081,
3086, 3089, 3094, 3095,
3108
Signal
3072, 3123
Signature
3066
Sony
3092, 3125
Sprucer
3118
Standard Component
3115
Starcom
3017, 3072, 3119, 3123
Stargate
3072, 3123
Starquest
3072, 3123
Supercable
3090
Supermax
3127
Tele+1
3107, 3111
Telepiu
3107
Thomson
3082, 3091
TIME WARNER 3084
Tocom
3067
Torx
3017
Toshiba
3122
Tristar
3127
Tudi
3102
Tusa
3072, 3123
TV86
3077
Unika
3065, 3070
United Cable
3018, 3119
Universal
3065, 3070
Universum
3097, 3099
V2
3127
Videoway
3019
View Star
3074, 3077, 3079
Viewmaster
3127
Vision
3127
Visiopass
Vortex View
Wittenberg
Zenith
Zentek
3097, 3100, 3101
3127
3098
3113, 3122, 3124
3126
Satellite
AB Sat
AccessHD
ADB
AGS
Akai
Alba
Aldes
Allsat
Allsonic
Alltech
Alpha
Alpha Digital
Alphastar
Amitronica
Amstrad
Anglo
Ankaro
Anttron
Apollo
Armstrong
Artec
Asat
ASLF
Astacom
Astra
Astro
AudioTon
Aurora
Austar
Axiel
Axis
Best
Blaupunkt
Blue Sky
Boca
Boston
Brain Wave
Broadcast
4216, 4217
4104
4220
4216
4053, 4055
4001, 4004, 4006, 4007,
4062, 4217
4005, 4007, 4010
4048, 4053, 4055
4005, 4008, 4024
4217
4053
4104
4077
4217
4011, 4035, 4217, 4218
4217
4005, 4008, 4024, 4217
4001, 4004
4001
4011, 4053
4100
4053, 4055
4217
4216
4009, 4011, 4054, 4217,
4219
4004, 4008, 4010, 4015,
4024, 4213, 4218, 4219
4004, 4048
4222
4222
4216
4008, 4009, 4024, 4050
4008, 4024
4015
4217
4011, 4054, 4059, 4217
4216
4013
4012
10
Broco
BSkyB
BT
Bubu Sat
Bush
Cambridge
Canal Satellite
Canal+
CaptiveWorks
Channel Master
Chaparral
CHEROKEE
Chess
CityCom
Clatronic
CNT
Comag
4217
4035, 4041
4216
4217
4006, 4045
4218
4213
4213
4099
4007, 4110
4075
4216
4212, 4217
4006, 4215, 4219
4013
4010
4080, 4081, 4082, 4083,
4086
Commlink
4005
Comtech
4050
Condor
4008, 4024, 4219
Connexions
4014, 4024
Conrad
4024, 4215, 4218, 4219
Conrad Electronic 4217, 4219
Contec
4050
Coolsat
4096
Cosat
4048
Coship
4109
Crown
4011
Daeryung
4014
Daewoo
4057, 4217
DDC
4007
Delega
4007
Dew
4050
Diamond
4051
Digiality
4219
Digital Stream 4105
DIRECTV
4056, 4064, 4067, 4068,
4070, 4071, 4074, 4107,
4116, 4119, 4121, 4122,
4123, 4127, 4192, 4193,
4194, 4195, 4196, 4197,
4198, 4199, 4200, 4201,
4202, 4203, 4206, 4207,
4221
Discoverer
4212
Discovery
4216
Diseqc
4216
Dish Network 4018, 4065, 4089, 4092,
4094, 4095, 4117
Dishpro
Distrisat
Ditristrad
DNT
Drake
DStv
Dune
Echostar
4018, 4117
4053
4048
4014, 4053, 4055
4072
4222
4024
4014, 4018, 4065, 4089,
4117, 4217
Einhell
4001, 4005, 4011, 4217,
4218
Elap
4216, 4217
Elekta
4010
Elsat
4217
Elta
4001, 4008, 4024, 4048,
4053, 4055
Emanon
4001
Emme Esse
4008, 4024
Engel
4217
Ep Sat
4006
EURIEULT
4031
Eurodec
4052
Europa
4053, 4218, 4219
Europhon
4219
Eurosat
4011
Eurosky
4008, 4011, 4215, 4218,
4219, 4024
Eurostar
4011, 4215, 4219
Eutelsat
4217
Exator
4001, 4004
Expressvu
4117
Fenner
4024, 4212, 4217
Ferguson
4006, 4052, 4214
Fidelity
4218
Finlandia
4006
Finlux
4006
FinnSat
4050, 4052
Flair Mate
4217
Foxtel
4222
Freecom
4001, 4049, 4218
FTEmaximal
4024, 4217
Fuba
4001, 4008, 4014, 4015,
4024, 4055, 4215
Galaxis
4005, 4008, 4009, 4024,
4048, 4050, 4215, 4222
GE
4066, 4093, 4111, 4197
General Instrument
4019, 4073
GMI
4011
GOI
4117
Goldbox
GoldStar
Goodmans
Goodmind
Grandin
Grothusen
Grundig
4213
4049
4002, 4006, 4029
4111
4031
4001, 4049
4004, 4006, 4015, 4035,
4211, 4218, 4222
Hänsel & Gretel 4219
Hantor
4001, 4013
Hanuri
4010
Hauppauge
4044
Heliocom
4219
Helium
4219
Hinari
4007
Hirschmann
4015, 4024, 4210, 4216,
4218, 4219
Hisawa
4013
Hisense
4016
Hitachi
4006, 4114, 4199, 4203
Homecast
4084, 4085, 4087
Houston
4048
HTS
4117
Hughes
4064, 4068, 4192, 4194,
4196, 4202
Hughes Network Systems
4071
Humax
4025, 4030, 4060, 4097
Huth
4005, 4011, 4012, 4013,
4048, 4050, 4219, 4223
Hypson
4031
Ilo
4016
Imex
4031
Innovation
4008
Insignia
4107
Intertronic
4011
Intervision
4048, 4219
ITT Nokia
4006
Jerrold
4019
Johansson
4013
JOK
4216
JSR
4048
JVC
4029, 4065, 4089, 4117
Kamm
4217
Kathrein
4015, 4034, 4042, 4053,
4055, 4063, 4215, 4216,
4217
Kathrein Eurostar 4215
Klap
4216
Konig
4219
Kosmos
KR
Kreiselmeyer
K-SAT
Kyostar
L&S Electronic
Lasat
4049
4004
4015
4217
4001
4024
4008, 4010, 4024, 4054,
4212, 4215, 4219
Lasonic
4108
Lenco
4001, 4024, 4049, 4215,
4217, 4219
Leng
4013
Lennox
4048
Lenson
4218
Lexus
4053
LG
4049, 4103, 4107
Lifesat
4008, 4024, 4212, 4217
Lifetec
4008
Lorenzen
4219
Lorraine
4049
Lupus
4008, 4024
Luxor
4218
Lyonnaise
4052
Macab
4052
Magnavox
4127, 4101
Manata
4031, 4216, 4217
Manhattan
4006, 4010, 4048, 4216
Marantz
4055
Mascom
4010
Maspro
4006, 4217
Matsui
4216
Max
4219
Mediabox
4213
Mediamarkt
4011
Mediasat
4009, 4213, 4218
Medion
4008, 4024, 4217
Medison
4217
Mega
4053, 4055
Memorex
4127
Metronic
4001, 4004, 4005, 4010,
4028, 4031, 4217
Metz
4015
Micro electronic 4217, 4218, 4219
Micro Technology 4217
MicroGem
4106
Micromaxx
4008, 4024
Microstar
4008
Microtec
4217
Minerva
4015
Mitsubishi
4006, 4015, 4202
11
Mitsumi
Morgan's
Motorola
Multichoice
Multitec
Muratto
Mysat
Navex
Neuhaus
Neusat
Next Level
NextWave
Nikko
Nokia
Nordmende
Nova
Novis
Oceanic
Octagon
Okano
Optex
Optus
Orbitech
OSat
Otto Versand
Pace
Pacific
Packsat
Palcom
Palladium
Palsat
Panasat
Panasonic
Panda
Pansat
Patriot
Paysat
PCT
Philco
Philips
Phoenix
Phonotrend
4054
4011, 4053, 4054, 4055,
4217
4019, 4088, 4090, 4091
4222
4212
4049
4217
4013
4009, 4048, 4217, 4218,
4219
4217
4019
4223
4011, 4217
4006, 4040
4001, 4006, 4007, 4010,
4052
4222
4013
4051
4001, 4004, 4050
4011
4048
4213, 4222, 4223
4001, 4212, 4213, 4218
4004
4015
4006, 4015, 4035, 4043,
4047, 4216
4051
4216
4007
4011, 4218
4212, 4218
4222
4006, 4035, 4036, 4121,
4124, 4126, 4198, 4221
4006, 4219
4125
4216
4127
4110
4101
4006, 4033, 4053, 4055,
4061, 4068, 4071, 4127,
4196, 4201, 4202, 4203,
4206, 4213, 4216
4050
4006, 4005, 4048
Pioneer
Polsat
Predki
Premiere
Priesner
Primestar
Profile
Promax
Prosat
Proscan
Protek
Proton
Provision
Quadral
Quelle
Quiero
RadioShack
Radiola
Radix
Rainbow
RCA
Realistic
Redpoint
Redstar
RFT
Roadstar
Roch
Rover
Saba
Sabre
Sagem
Sakura
Samsung
SAT
Sat Cruiser
Sat Partner
Sat Team
Satcom
Satec
Satelco
Satford
Satmaster
Satplus
Schneider
4046, 4213
4052
4013
4048, 4213
4011
4076
4216
4006
4005, 4007
4066, 4093, 4122, 4197
4051
4016
4010
4005, 4007, 4008, 4216,
4024
4015, 4215, 4219
4052
4019
4053, 4055
4014, 4037
4004
4066, 4093, 4112, 4113,
4116, 4118, 4119, 4197,
4122, 4207
4078
4009
4008, 4024
4005, 4053, 4055
4217
4031
4024, 4217
4010, 4215, 4216, 4219
4006
4023, 4052
4050
4000, 4001, 4003, 4032,
4064, 4069, 4071, 4120,
4123, 4196, 4200
4007, 4218
4223
4001, 4004, 4010, 4013,
4049, 4218
4217
4012, 4219
4217
4024
4012
4012
4212
4008, 4212, 4216
Schwaiger
SCS
Seemann
SEG
Seleco
Servi Sat
Siemens
Silva
Skantin
Skardin
Skinsat
SKR
Skymaster
Skymax
SkySat
Skyvision
SM Electronic
Smart
Sony
SR
Star Choice
Starland
Starring
Start Trak
Strong
STS
STVI
Sumida
Sunny Sound
Sunsat
Sunstar
Supermax
Tandberg
Tandy
Tantec
TCM
Techniland
TechniSat
Technology
Technosat
Technowelt
Teco
Telanor
Telasat
Telecom
Telefunken
4051, 4212, 4219
4215
4009, 4011, 4014
4001, 4008, 4013, 4024
4048
4031, 4217
4015
4049
4217
4009
4218
4217
4005, 4017, 4022, 4212,
4217
4053, 4055
4212, 4217, 4218, 4219
4048
4212, 4217
4215, 4217
4067, 4070, 4213
4011, 4054
4019
4217
4013
4001
4001, 4004, 4008, 4024,
4049, 4222
4115
4031
4011
4024
4217
4011, 4024, 4054
4223
4052
4004
4006
4008
4012
4014, 4021, 4026, 4027,
4038, 4039, 4053, 4212,
4213, 4218
4222
4223
4219
4011, 4054
4007
4215, 4219
4217
4001, 4017, 4216
Teleka
Telemaster
Telesat
Telestar
Televes
Telewire
Tempo
Tevion
Thomson
Thorens
Thorn
Tivax
Tivo
Tokai
Tonna
Toshiba
Triad
Triasat
Triax
Turnsat
Tvonics
Twinner
UEC
Uher
UltimateTV
Uniden
Unisat
Unitor
Universum
US Digital
Variosat
Vega
Ventana
Viewsat
Visiosat
Voom
Vortec
Welltech
WeTeKom
Wevasat
Wewa
Winersat
Wisi
Woorisat
Worldsat
4004, 4011, 4014, 4218,
4219
4010
4219
4212, 4213, 4218
4006, 4218
4048
4223
4008, 4217
4006, 4020, 4052, 4058,
4208, 4213, 4215, 4216,
4217, 4219
4051
4006
4104
4196
4053
4006, 4012, 4048, 4217,
4218
4194, 4202, 4203
4049
4218
4015, 4215, 4217, 4218
4217
4214
4031, 4217
4222
4212
4070
4079, 4127
4011, 4050, 4053
4013
4015, 4215, 4219
4016
4015
4024
4053, 4055
4098
4013, 4048, 4216, 4217
4019
4001
4212
4212, 4218
4006
4006
4013
4006, 4014, 4015, 4218,
4219
4010
4216
12
Xrypton
XSat
Zehnder
Zenith
Zodiac
4024
4217
4008, 4209, 4010, 4215,
4024
4102, 4107, 4195
4004
MD
Yamaha
XM
5080, 5081, 5086
Tape
Yamaha
CD
Yamaha
LD
5091, 5093
SIRIUS
5084, 5087
Yamaha
Yamaha
2080
Amplifier
5064, 5067
Yamaha
5019, 5020, 5098
5082, 5095
Tuner
CD Recorder
Yamaha
Yamaha
Yamaha
DOCK
5066, 5085, 5088, 5090,
5092
Yamaha
Apple TV
5068, 5089
2241
“Apple TV” is a trademark or registered mark
of Apple Inc.
5083
NET
Yamaha
Apple
5071, 5076, 5079, 5094
© 2011 Yamaha Corporation
YD340B0/RC